N-substituted benzamides and methods of use thereof

ABSTRACT

The invention provides methods for treating pain using compounds having the general formula: 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein the variables R A , subscript n, ring A, X 2 , L, subscript m, X 1 , ring D, R 1 , and R N  have the meaning as described herein.

PRIORITY OF INVENTION

This application is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/413,218, filed Jan. 6, 2015, which is a 35 U.S.C. § 371 application of International Application No. PCT/US2013/049423, filed Jul. 5, 2013, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/668,951, filed Jul. 6, 2012. The entire content of the applications referenced above are hereby incorporated by reference herein.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to organic compounds useful for therapy and/or prophylaxis in a mammal, and in particular to inhibitors of sodium channel (e.g., NaV1.7) that are useful for treating sodium channel-mediated diseases or conditions, such as pain, as well as other diseases and conditions associated with the mediation of sodium channels.

Voltage-gated sodium channels, transmembrane proteins that initiate action potentials in nerve, muscle and other electrically excitable cells, are a necessary component of normal sensation, emotions, thoughts and movements (Catterall, W. A., Nature (2001), Vol. 409, pp. 988-990). These channels consist of a highly processed alpha subunit that is associated with auxiliary beta subunits. The pore-forming alpha subunit is sufficient for channel function, but the kinetics and voltage dependence of channel gating are in part modified by the beta subunits (Goldin et al., Neuron (2000), Vol. 28, pp. 365-368). Electrophysiological recording, biochemical purification, and molecular cloning have identified ten different sodium channel alpha subunits and four beta subunits (Yu, F. H., et al., Sci. STKE (2004), 253; and Yu, F. H., et al., Neurosci. (2003), 20:7577-85).

The hallmarks of sodium channels include rapid activation and inactivation when the voltage across the plasma membrane of an excitable cell is depolarized (voltage-dependent gating), and efficient and selective conduction of sodium ions through conducting pores intrinsic to the structure of the protein (Sato, C., et al., Nature (2001), 409:1047-1051). At negative or hyperpolarized membrane potentials, sodium channels are closed. Following membrane depolarization, sodium channels open rapidly and then inactivate. Channels only conduct currents in the open state and, once inactivated, have to return to the resting state, favoured by membrane hyperpolarization, before they can reopen. Different sodium channel subtypes vary in the voltage range over which they activate and inactivate as well as their activation and inactivation kinetics.

The sodium channel family of proteins has been extensively studied and shown to be involved in a number of vital body functions. Research in this area has identified variants of the alpha subunits that result in major changes in channel function and activities, which can ultimately lead to major pathophysiological conditions. The members of this family of proteins are denoted NaV1.x, where x=1 to 9. NaV1.1 and NaV1.2 are highly expressed in the brain (Raymond, C. K., et al., J. Biol. Chem. (2004), 279(44):46234-41) and are vital to normal brain function. Some loss of function mutations in NaV1.1 in humans result in epilepsy, apparently because many of these channels are expressed in inhibitory neurons (Yu, F. H., et al., Nat Neurosci (2006), 9 (9), 1142-9). Thus, block of NaV1.1 in the CNS may be counter-productive because it can produce hyperexcitability. However, NaV1.1 is also expressed in the peripheral nervous system and block may afford analgesic activity.

NaV1.3 is expressed primarily in the fetal central nervous system. It is expressed at very low levels or not at all in the peripheral nervous system, but expression is upregulated in the dorsal horn sensory neurons of rats after nervous system injury (Hains, B. D., et al., J. Neurosci. (2003), 23(26):8881-92). Thus, it is an inducible target for treatment of pain following nerve injury.

NaV1.4 is expressed primarily in skeletal muscle (Raymond, C. K., et al., op. cit.). Mutations in this gene have been shown to have profound effects on muscle function including paralysis, (Tamaoka A., Intern. Med. (2003), (9):769-70).

NaV1.5, is expressed mainly in cardiac myocytes (Raymond, C. K., et al., op. cit.), including atria, ventricles, the sino-atrial node, atrio-ventricular node and cardiac Purkinje fibers. The rapid upstroke of the cardiac action potential and the rapid impulse conduction through cardiac tissue is due to the opening of NaV1.5. Abnormalities in the function of NaV1.5 can result in the genesis of a variety of cardiac arrhythmias. Mutations in human NaV1.5 result in multiple arrhythmic syndromes, including, for example, long QT3 (LQT3), Brugada syndrome (BS), an inherited cardiac conduction defect, sudden unexpected nocturnal death syndrome (SUNDS) and sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS) (Liu, H., et al., Am. J. Pharmacogenomics (2003), 3(3): 173-9). Sodium channel blocker therapy has been used extensively in treating cardiac arrhythmias.

NaV1.6 is a widely distributed voltage-gated sodium channel found throughout the central and peripheral nervous systems. It is expressed at high density in the nodes of Ranvier of myelinated neurons (Caldwell, J. H., et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (2000), 97(10): 5616-20).

NaV1.7 is a tetrodotoxin-sensitive voltage-gated sodium channel encoded by the gene SCN9A. Human NaV1.7 was first cloned from neuroendocrine cells (Klugbauer, N., et al., 1995 EMBO J., 14 (6): 1084-90.) and rat NaV1.7 was cloned from a pheochromocytoma PC12 cell line (Toledo-Aral, J. J., et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1997), 94:1527-1532) and from rat dorsal root ganglia (Sangameswaran, L., et al., (1997), J. Biol. Chem., 272 (23): 14805-9). NaV1.7 is expressed primarily in the peripheral nervous system, especially nociceptors and olfactory neurons and sympathetic neurons. The inhibition, or blocking, of NaV1.7 has been shown to result in analgesic activity. Knockout of NaV1.7 expression in a subset of sensory neurons that are predominantly nociceptive results in resistance to inflammatory pain (Nassar, et al., op. cit.). Likewise, loss of function mutations in humans results in congenital indifference to pain (CIP), in which the individuals are resistant to both inflammatory and neuropathic pain (Cox, J. J., et al., Nature (2006); 444:894-898; Goldberg, Y. P., et al., Clin. Genet. (2007); 71:311-319). Conversely, gain of function mutations in NaV1.7 have been established in two human heritable pain conditions, primary erythromelalgia and familial rectal pain, (Yang, Y., et al., J. Med. Genet. (2004), 41(3):171-4). In addition, a single nucleotide polymorphism (R1150W) that has very subtle effects on the time- and voltage-dependence of channel gating has large effects on pain perception (Estacion, M., et al., 2009. Ann Neurol 66: 862-6; Reimann, F., et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA (2010), 107: 5148-53). About 10% of the patients with a variety of pain conditions have the allele conferring greater sensitivity to pain and thus might be more likely to respond to block of NaV1.7. Because NaV1.7 is expressed in both sensory and sympathetic neurons, one might expect that enhanced pain perception would be accompanied by cardiovascular abnormalities such as hypertension, but no correlation has been reported. Thus, both the CIP mutations and SNP analysis suggest that human pain responses are more sensitive to changes in NaV1.7 currents than are perturbations of autonomic function.

NaV1.8 is expressed primarily in sensory ganglia of the peripheral nervous system, such as the dorsal root ganglia (Raymond, C. K., et al., op. cit.). There are no identified human mutations for NaV1.8 that produce altered pain responses. NaV1.8 differs from most neuronal NaV's in that it is insensitive to block by tetrodotoxin. Thus, one can isolate the current carried by this channel with tetrodotoxin. These studies have shown that a substantial portion of total sodium current is NaV1.8 in some dorsal root ganglion neurons (Blair, N. T., et al., J Neurosci (2002), 22: 10277-90). Knock-down of NaV1.8 in rats has been achieved by using antisense DNA or small interfering RNAs and virtually complete reversal of neuropathic pain was achieved in the spinal nerve ligation and chronic constriction injury models (Dong, X. W., et al., Neuroscience (2007), 146: 812-21; Lai J., et al. Pain (2002), 95: 143-52). Thus, NaV1.8 is considered a promising target for analgesic agents based upon the limited tissue distribution of this NaV isoform and the analgesic activity produced by knock-down of channel expression.

NaV1.9 is also a tetrodotoxin insensitive, sodium channel expressed primarily in dorsal root ganglia neurons (Dib-Hajj, S. D., et al. (see Dib-Hajj, S. D., et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1998), 95(15):8963-8). It is also expressed in enteric neurons, especially the myenteric plexus (Rugiero, F., et al., J Neurosci (2003), 23: 2715-25). The limited tissue distribution of this NaV isoform suggests that it may be a useful target for analgesic agents (Lai, J., et al., op. cit.; Wood, J. N., et al., op. cit.; Chung, J. M., et al., op. cit.). Knock-out of NaV1.9 results in resistance to some forms of inflammatory pain (Amaya, F., et al., J Neurosci (2006), 26: 12852-60; Priest, B. T., et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA (2005), 102: 9382-7).

This closely related family of proteins has long been recognized as targets for therapeutic intervention. Sodium channels are targeted by a diverse array of pharmacological agents. These include neurotoxins, antiarrhythmics, anticonvulsants and local anesthetics (England, S., et al., Future Med Chem (2010), 2: 775-90; Termin, A., et al., Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry (2008), 43: 43-60). All of the current pharmacological agents that act on sodium channels have receptor sites on the alpha subunits. At least six distinct receptor sites for neurotoxins and one receptor site for local anesthetics and related drugs have been identified (Cestele, S., et al., Biochimie (2000), Vol. 82, pp. 883-892).

The small molecule sodium channel blockers or the local anesthetics and related antiepileptic and antiarrhythmic drugs interact with overlapping receptor sites located in the inner cavity of the pore of the sodium channel (Catterall, W. A., Neuron (2000), 26:13-25). Amino acid residues in the S6 segments from at least three of the four domains contribute to this complex drug receptor site, with the IVS6 segment playing the dominant role. These regions are highly conserved and as such most sodium channel blockers known to date interact with similar potency with all channel subtypes. Nevertheless, it has been possible to produce sodium channel blockers with therapeutic selectivity and a sufficient therapeutic window for the treatment of epilepsy (e.g., lamotrignine, phenytoin and carbamazepine) and certain cardiac arrhythmias (e.g., lignocaine, tocainide and mexiletine). However, the potency and therapeutic index of these blockers is not optimal and have limited the usefulness of these compounds in a variety of therapeutic areas where a sodium channel blocker would be ideally suited.

Sodium channel blockers have been shown to be useful in the treatment of pain, including acute, chronic, inflammatory and/or neuropathic pain (see, e.g., Wood, J. N., et al., J. Neurobiol. (2004), 61(1), 55-71. Preclinical evidence demonstrates that sodium channel blockers can suppress neuronal firing in peripheral and central sensory neurons, and it is via this mechanism that they are considered to be useful for relieving pain. In some instances, abnormal or ectopic firing can originate from injured or otherwise sensitized neurons. For example, it has been shown that sodium channels can accumulate in peripheral nerves at sites of axonal injury and may function as generators of ectopic firing (Devor et al., J. Neurosci. (1993), 132: 1976). Changes in sodium channel expression and excitability have also been shown in animal models of inflammatory pain where treatment with proinflammatory materials (CFA, Carrageenan) promoted pain-related behaviors and correlated with increased expression of sodium channel subunits (Gould et al., Brain Res., (1999), 824(2): 296-99; Black et al., Pain (2004), 108(3): 237-47). Alterations in either the level of expression or distribution of sodium channels, therefore, may have a major influence on neuronal excitability and pain-related behaviors.

Controlled infusions of lidocaine, a known sodium channel blocker, indicate that the drug is efficacious against neuropathic pain, but has a narrow therapeutic index. Likewise, the orally available local anesthetic, mexiletine, has dose-limiting side effects (Wallace, M. S., et al., Reg. Anesth. Pain Med. (2000), 25: 459-67). A major focus of drug discovery targeting voltage-gated sodium channels has been on strategies for improving the therapeutic index. One of the leading strategies is to identify selective sodium channel blockers designed to preferentially block NaV1.7, NaV1.8, NaV1.9 and/or NaV1.3. These are the sodium channel isoforms preferentially expressed in sensory neurons and unlikely to be involved in generating any dose-limiting side effects. For example, there is concern that blocking of NaV1.5 would be arrhythmogenic, so that selectivity of a sodium channel blocker against NaV1.5 is viewed as highly desirable. Furthermore, nearly 700 mutations of the SCN1A gene that codes for NaV1.1 have been identified in patients with Severe Myoclonic Epilepsy of Infancy (SMEI), making this the most commonly mutated gene in human epilepsy. Half of these mutations result in protein truncation (Meisler, M. H., et al., The Journal of Physiology (2010), 588: 1841-8). Thus, selectivity of a sodium channel blocker against NaV1.1 is also desirable.

In addition to the strategies of identifying selective sodium channel blockers, there is the continuing strategy of identifying therapeutic agents for the treatment of neuropathic pain. There has been some degree of success in treating neuropathic pain symptoms by using medications originally approved as anticonvulsants, such as gabapentin, and more recently pregabalin. However, pharmacotherapy for neuropathic pain has generally had limited success for a variety of reasons: sedation, especially by drugs first developed as anticonvulsants or anti-depressants, addiction or tachyphylaxis, especially by opiates, or lack of efficacy, especially by NSAIDs and anti-inflammatory agents. Consequently, there is still a considerable need to explore novel treatment modalities for neuropathic pain, which includes, but is not limited to, post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, chronic lower back pain, phantom limb pain, and pain resulting from cancer and chemotherapy, chronic pelvic pain, complex regional pain syndrome and related neuralgias.

There are a limited number of effective sodium channel blockers for the treatment of pain with a minimum of adverse side effects which are currently in the clinic. There is also an unmet medical need to treat neuropathic pain and other sodium channel associated pathological states effectively and without adverse side effects due to the blocking of sodium channels not involved in nociception. The present invention provides methods to meet these critical needs.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In one aspect the present invention provides for novel compounds. In a first embodiment of such compounds (Embodiment 1; abbreviated as “E1”) the invention provides for a compound of formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein in Formula I:

R¹ is selected from the group consisting of a —NR^(1A)R^(1B), —X^(1R)—NR^(1A)R^(1B), —X^(1R)—OR^(1A), 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms and 4-10 membered C-linked heterocycloalkyl comprising 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms; R^(1A) and R^(1B) are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈ alkyl, —C(═Y¹)OR^(R1C), —C(═Y¹)R^(R1C), —C(═Y¹)N(R^(R1C))₂, —(X^(1R))₀₋₁R^(x), and C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(1A) and R^(1B) are optionally combined to form a 4-10 membered heterocyclic ring optionally comprising 1 to 3 additional heteroatoms selected from N, O and S as ring vertices; R^(R1C) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl; X^(1R) is independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene, wherein X^(1R) is optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from oxo and thioxo; Y¹ is independently O or S; R^(x) is independently selected from the group consisting of 6-10 membered aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl and C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl; and wherein R¹ is optionally further substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, C₃₋₈ heterocycloalkyl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, 6-10 membered aryl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, 5-10 membered heteroaryl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —(X^(1R))₀₋₁NR^(R1a)R^(R1b), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁SR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═Y¹)OR^(R1c), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OC(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), (X^(1R))₀₋₁C(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═O)R^(R1b), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁C(═O)OR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OC(═O)R^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁—P(═O)(OR^(R1a))(OR^(R1b)), (X^(1R))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂R^(R1c), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), (X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)) and —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))S(O)₁₋₂(R^(R1c)); R^(R1a) and R^(R1b) are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(R1a) and R^(R1b) together with a nitrogen to which they are attached form a morpholino, piperidino, or piperazinyl ring, wherein said ring is optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from C₁₋₈alkyl, halo, hydroxy, C₁₋₈ alkylamino, C₁₋₈ dialkylamino, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl and C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl; R^(R1c) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy;

R^(N) is hydrogen, C₁₋₄ alkyl or C₁₋₄ haloalkyl;

D¹ is N or C(R^(D1));

D³ is N or C(R^(D3));

R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy;

L is a linker selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene, C₂₋₄ alkynylene, and C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, wherein L is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of ═O, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ acyl;

the subscript m represents the integer 0 or 1;

X¹ and X² are each independently selected from the group consisting of absent, —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂— —N(H)—, and —N(R^(x1))— wherein R^(x1) is C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈ acyl or —S(O)₂(C₁₋₈ alkyl), and wherein if the subscript m is 0 then one of X¹ or X² is absent;

the subscript n is an integer from 0 to 5;

A ring represents a 6-10 membered aryl or a 5-10 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S;

R^(A) at each occurrence, is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁, C₃₋₈ halocycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁, C₁₋₈ cyanoalkyl, C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, C₂₋₉ heterocycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, C₆₋₁₀ membered aryl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, —(X^(RA))₀₋₁NR^(A1)R^(A2), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁SR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)OR^(A3), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OC(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)R^(A2), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)R^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)OR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OC(═O)R^(A1), —P(═O)(OR^(A1))(OR^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂R^(A3), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))S(O)₁₋₂(R^(A3)); each X^(RA) is independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene, which C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene is optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from oxo and thioxo; R^(A1) and R^(A2) are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(A1) and R^(A2) together with a nitrogen to which they are attached form a morpholino, piperidino, or piperazinyl ring, which ring is optionally substituted with one or more C₁₋₈alkyl, halo, hydroxy, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl; R^(A3) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; wherein R^(A) is optionally further substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —NH₂, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo (═O), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-S(O)₀₋₂—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, (haloalkyl)₂N—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, haloalkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, (haloalkyl)₂N—C(═O)O—, C₁₋₄ alkylamino, C₁₋₄ dialkylamino, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkoxy, C₂₋₅ heterocycloalkoxy and tetrahydronaphthalene.

In another aspect the present invention provides for a pharmaceutical composition comprising compounds of formula I or any embodiment thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

In another aspect of the invention, the present invention provides for a method of treating diseases and conditions in a mammal by administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect of the invention, the present invention provides for a method of decreasing ion flux through a voltage-dependent sodium channel in a mammal comprising administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect of the invention, the present invention provides for a method of treating pruritus or cancer in ion flux through a voltage-dependent sodium channel in the mammal comprising administering to the mammal in need thereof a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect of the invention, the present invention provides for a method of treating or treating but not preventing pain in a mammal comprising administering to the mammal in need thereof a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect of the invention, the present invention provides for a method for the treatment or prophylaxis of pain, depression, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases and psychiatric diseases, or combinations thereof, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of formula I, or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect, the present invention provides for a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for the use as a medicament for the treatment of diseases and disorders selected from the group consisting of pain, depression, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases and psychiatric disorders, or combinations thereof, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of formula I, or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect, the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of diseases and disorders selected from the group consisting of pain, depression, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases and psychiatric diseases, or combinations thereof, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of formula I, or an embodiment thereof.

In another aspect, the present invention provides for a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for use in medical therapy.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions

As used herein, the term “alkyl”, by itself or as part of another substituent, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., C₁₋₈ means one to eight carbons). Examples of alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, and the like. The term “alkenyl” refers to an unsaturated alkyl radical having one or more double bonds. Similarly, the term “alkynyl” refers to an unsaturated alkyl radical having one or more triple bonds. Examples of such unsaturated alkyl groups include vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers. The term “cycloalkyl,” “carbocyclic,” or “carbocycle” refers to hydrocarbon ring system having 3 to 10 overall number of ring atoms (e.g., 3-10 membered cycloalkyl is a cycloalkyl with 3 to 10 ring atoms, or C₃₋₁₀ cycloalkyl is a cycloalkyl with 3-10 carbon ring atoms) and for a 3-5 membered cycloalkyl being fully saturated or having no more than one double bond between ring vertices and for a 6 membered cycloalkyl or larger being fully saturated or having no more than two double bonds between ring vertices. As used herein, “cycloalkyl,” “carbocyclic,” or “carbocycle” is also meant to refer to bicyclic, polycyclic and spirocyclic hydrocarbon ring system, such as, for example, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, pinane, bicyclo[2.2.2]octane, adamantane, norbornene, spirocyclic C₅₋₁₂ alkane, etc. As used herein, the terms, “alkenyl,” “alkynyl,” “cycloalkyl,”, “carbocycle,” and “carbocyclic,” are meant to include mono and polyhalogenated variants thereof.

The term “heteroalkyl”, by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and from one to three heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms can optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom can optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s) O, N and S can be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group. The heteroatom Si can be placed at any position of the heteroalkyl group, including the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. A “heteroalkyl” can contain up to three units of unsaturation, and also include mono- and poly-halogenated variants, or combinations thereof. Examples include —CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—O—CF₃, —CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—N(CH₃)—CH₃, —CH₂—S—CH₂—CH₃, —S(O)—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—S(O)₂—CH₃, —CH═CH—O—CH₃, —Si(CH₃)₃, —CH₂—CH═N—OCH₃, and —CH═CH═N(CH₃)—CH₃. Up to two heteroatoms can be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH₂—NH—OCH₃ and —CH₂—O—Si(CH₃)₃.

The term “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” refers to a saturated or partially unsaturated ring system radical having the overall having from 3-10 ring atoms (e.g., 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a heterocycloalkyl radical with 3-10 ring atoms, a C₂₋₉ heterocycloalkyl is a heterocycloalkyl having 3-10 ring atoms with between 2-9 ring atoms being carbon) that contain from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized, as ring atoms. Unless otherwise stated, a “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” ring can be a monocyclic, a bicyclic, spirocyclic or a polycyclic ring system. The terms “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” and “heterocycle” also include polycyclic ring systems wherein at least one ring is a saturated or partially unsaturated ring that contains from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, as defined above; such polycyclic ring systems can also include fused aromatic, fused heteroaromatic, or fused carbocyclic rings as defined herein within the polycyclic ring systems. A “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” ring can be substituted with one or more oxo or thioxo groups. Non limiting examples of “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” rings include pyrrolidine, piperidine, N-methylpiperidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, butyrolactam, valerolactam, imidazolidinone, hydantoin, dioxolane, phthalimide, piperidine, pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione, 1,4-dioxane, morpholine, thiomorpholine, thiomorpholine-S-oxide, thiomorpholine-S,S-oxide, piperazine, pyran, pyridone, 3-pyrroline, thiopyran, pyrone, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, quinuclidine, tropane, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, (1s,4s)-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, indolin-2-one, 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridin-2(3H)-one and the like A “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through one or more ring carbons or heteroatoms. A “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” can include mono- and poly-halogenated variants thereof.

The term “alkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from an alkane (including branched alkane), as exemplified by —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂— and —CH(CH₂)CH₂CH₂—. Typically, an alkyl (or alkylene) group will have from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, with those groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms being preferred in the present invention. “Alkenylene” and “alkynylene” refer to the unsaturated forms of “alkylene” having double or triple bonds, respectively. “Alkylene”, “alkenylene” and “alkynylene” are also meant to include mono and poly-halogenated variants.

The term “heteroalkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical, saturated or unsaturated or polyunsaturated, derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified by —CH₂—CH₂—S—CH₂CH₂— and —CH₂—S—CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₂—, —O—CH₂—CH═CH—, —CH₂—CH═C(H)CH₂—O—CH₂— and —S—CH₂—C≡C—. For heteroalkylene groups, heteroatoms can also occupy either or both of the chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxy, alkylenedioxy, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like). The term “heteroalkylene” is also meant to include mono and poly-halogenated variants.

The terms “alkoxy,” “alkylamino” and “alkylthio”, are used in their conventional sense, and refer to those alkyl groups attached to the remainder of the molecule via an oxygen atom (“oxy”), an amino group (“amino”) or thio group, and further include mono- and poly-halogenated variants thereof. Additionally, for dialkylamino groups, the alkyl portions can be the same or different.

The terms “halo” or “halogen,” by themselves or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine atom. The term “(halo)alkyl” is meant to include both an “alkyl” and “haloalkyl” substituent. Additionally, the term “haloalkyl,” is meant to include monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl. For example, the term “C₁₋₄ haloalkyl” is mean to include trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, difluoromethyl, and the like.

The term “aryl” means, unless otherwise stated, a polyunsaturated, typically aromatic, hydrocarbon ring radical, which can be a single ring or multiple rings (up to three rings) which are fused together and having the stated number of aryl ring atoms. The term includes polycyclic ring systems wherein at least one ring is polyunsaturated. The term “heteroaryl” refers to aryl ring(s) that contain from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized. A heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom. Non-limiting examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and biphenyl, while non-limiting examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimindinyl, triazinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalaziniyl, benzotriazinyl, purinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isobenzofuryl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, benzotriazinyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, imidazopyridines, benzothiaxolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, indolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazolyl, indazolyl, pteridinyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, thienyl and the like. Optional substituents for each of the above noted aryl and heteroaryl ring systems can be selected from the group of acceptable substituents described further below.

The term “C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl” includes an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) hydroxy groups.

The term “C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl” includes an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl groups

The term “C₃₋₈ halocycloalkyl” includes a C₃₋₈cycloalkyl group that is substituted with one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) halo groups

The term “C₁₋₈ cyanoalkyl” includes an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) cyano groups

The term “C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy” includes an alkoxy group that is substituted with one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) C₃₋₈cycloalkyl groups.

The term “oxo” means a double-bonded oxygen (═O), and the term “thioxo” means a double bonded sulfur (═S).

The above terms (e.g., “alkyl,” “aryl” and “heteroaryl”), in some embodiments, will include both substituted and unsubstituted forms of the indicated radical. Preferred substituents for each type of radical are provided below.

Substituents for the alkyl radicals (including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl) can be a variety of groups including, but not limited to halogen, —OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —SiR′R″R′″, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO₂R′, —CONR′R″, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR′″C(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)₂R′, —NHC(NH₂)═NH, —NR′C(NH₂)═NH, —NHC(NH₂)═NR′, —NR′″C(NR′R″)═N—CN, —NR′″C(NR′R″)═NOR′, —NHC(NH₂)═NR′, —S(O)R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)₂NR′R″, —NR′S(O)₂R″, —NR′″S(O)₂NR′R″, —CN, —NO₂, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—OR′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—NR′R″, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—SR′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—SiR′R″R′″, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—OC(O)R′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—C(O)R′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—CO₂R′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄CONR′R″, in a number ranging from zero to (2m′+1), where m′ is the total number of carbon atoms in such radical. R′, R″ and R′″ each independently refer to groups including, for example, hydrogen, unsubstituted C₁₋₆ alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens, unsubstituted C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy or C₁₋₆ thioalkoxy groups, or unsubstituted aryl-C₁₋₄ alkyl groups, unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, among others. When R′ and R″ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring. For example, —NR′R″ is meant to include 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. Other substituents for alkyl radicals, including heteroalkyl, alkylene, include for example, ═O, ═NR′, ═N—OR′, ═N—CN, ═NH, wherein R′ includes substituents as described above.

Similarly, substituents for the aryl and heteroaryl groups are varied and are generally selected from the group including, but not limited to, halogen, —OR′, —OC(O)R′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —R′, —CN, —NO₂, —CO₂R′, —CONR′R″, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR″C(O)₂R′, —NR′C(O)NR″R′″, —NHC(NH₂)═NH, —NR′C(NH₂)═NH, —NHC(NH₂)═NR′, —S(O)R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)₂NR′R″, —NR′S(O)₂R″, —N₃, perfluoro-C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and perfluoro-C₁₋₄ alkyl, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—OR′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—NR′R″, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—SR′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—SiR′R″R′″, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—OC(O)R′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—C(O)R′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄—CO₂R′, —(CH₂)₁₋₄CONR′R″, in a number ranging from zero to the total number of open valences on the aromatic ring system; and where R′, R″ and R′″ are independently selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, unsubstituted aryl and heteroaryl, (unsubstituted aryl)-C₁₋₄ alkyl, and unsubstituted aryloxy-C₁₋₄ alkyl. Other suitable substituents include each of the above aryl substituents attached to a ring atom by an alkylene tether of from 1-4 carbon atoms. When a substituent for the aryl or heteroaryl group contains an alkylene linker (e.g., —(CH₂)₁₋₄—NR′R″), the alkylene linker includes halo variants as well. For example, the linker “—(CH₂)₁₋₄—” when used as part of a substituent is meant to include difluoromethylene, 1,2-difluoroethylene, etc.

As used herein, the term “heteroatom” is meant to include oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S) and silicon (Si).

As used herein, the term “chiral” refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.

As used herein, the term “stereoisomers” refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.

As used herein a wavy line “

” that intersects a bond in a chemical structure indicates the point of attachment of the bond that the wavy bond intersects in the chemical structure to the remainder of a molecule.

As used herein, the term “C-linked” means that the group that the term describes is attached the remainder of the molecule through a ring carbon atom.

As used herein, the term “N-linked” means that the group that the term describes is attached to the remainder of the molecule through a ring nitrogen atom.

“Diastereomer” refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers can separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.

“Enantiomers” refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.

Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and Eliel, E. and Wilen, S., “Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1994. The compounds of the invention can contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and therefore exist in different stereoisomeric forms. It is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, including but not limited to, diastereomers, enantiomers and atropisomers, as well as mixtures thereof such as racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention. Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L, or R and S, are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and l or (+) and (−) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (−) or l meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which can occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process. The terms “racemic mixture” and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.

As used herein, the term “tautomer” or “tautomeric form” refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier. For example, proton tautomers (also known as prototropic tautomers) include interconversions via migration of a proton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerizations. Valence tautomers include interconversions by reorganization of some of the bonding electrons.

As used herein, the term “solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of the invention. Examples of solvents that form solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine. The term “hydrate” refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water.

As used herein, the term “protecting group” refers to a substituent that is commonly employed to block or protect a particular functional group on a compound. For example, an “amino-protecting group” is a substituent attached to an amino group that blocks or protects the amino functionality in the compound. Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl (Fmoc). Similarly, a “hydroxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of a hydroxy group that blocks or protects the hydroxy functionality. Suitable protecting groups include acetyl and silyl. A “carboxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of the carboxy group that blocks or protects the carboxy functionality. Common carboxy-protecting groups include phenylsulfonylethyl, cyanoethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl, 2-(p-nitrophenylsulfenyl)ethyl, 2-(diphenylphosphino)-ethyl, nitroethyl and the like. For a general description of protecting groups and their use, see P. G. M. Wuts and T. W. Greene, Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis 4^(th) edition, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 2006.

As used herein, the term “mammal” includes, but is not limited to, humans, mice, rats, guinea pigs, monkeys, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, and sheep

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” is meant to include salts of the active compounds which are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases, depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively acidic functionalities, base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable inorganic bases include aluminum, ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium, sodium, zinc and the like. Salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable organic bases include salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, including substituted amines, cyclic amines, naturally-occurring amines and the like, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine and the like. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from relatively nontoxic organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like (see, for example, Berge, S. M., et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts”, Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 1977, 66, 1-19). Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.

The neutral forms of the compounds can be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner. The parent form of the compound differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to the parent form of the compound for the purposes of the present invention.

In addition to salt forms, the present invention provides compounds which are in a prodrug form. As used herein the term “prodrug” refers to those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present invention. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the present invention when placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.

Prodrugs of the invention include compounds wherein an amino acid residue, or a polypeptide chain of two or more (e.g., two, three or four) amino acid residues, is covalently joined through an amide or ester bond to a free amino, hydroxy or carboxylic acid group of a compound of the present invention. The amino acid residues include but are not limited to the 20 naturally occurring amino acids commonly designated by three letter symbols and also includes phosphoserine, phosphothreonine, phosphotyrosine, 4-hydroxyproline, hydroxylysine, demosine, isodemosine, gamma-carboxyglutamate, hippuric acid, octahydroindole-2-carboxylic acid, statine, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid, penicillamine, ornithine, 3-methylhistidine, norvaline, beta-alanine, gamma-aminobutyric acid, citrulline, homocysteine, homoserine, methyl-alanine, para-benzoylphenylalanine, phenylglycine, propargylglycine, sarcosine, methionine sulfone and tert-butylglycine.

Additional types of prodrugs are also encompassed. For instance, a free carboxyl group of a compound of the invention can be derivatized as an amide or alkyl ester. As another example, compounds of this invention comprising free hydroxy groups can be derivatized as prodrugs by converting the hydroxy group into a group such as, but not limited to, a phosphate ester, hemisuccinate, dimethylaminoacetate, or phosphoryloxymethyloxycarbonyl group, as outlined in Fleisher, D. et al., (1996) Improved oral drug delivery: solubility limitations overcome by the use of prodrugs Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 19:115. Carbamate prodrugs of hydroxy and amino groups are also included, as are carbonate prodrugs, sulfonate esters and sulfate esters of hydroxy groups. Derivatization of hydroxy groups as (acyloxy)methyl and (acyloxy)ethyl ethers, wherein the acyl group can be an alkyl ester optionally substituted with groups including, but not limited to, ether, amine and carboxylic acid functionalities, or where the acyl group is an amino acid ester as described above, are also encompassed. Prodrugs of this type are described in J. Med. Chem., (1996), 39:10. More specific examples include replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as (C₁₋₆)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((C₁₋₆)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((C₁₋₆)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (C₁₋₆)alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N—(C₁₋₆)alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (C₁₋₆)alkanoyl, alpha-amino(C₁₋₄)alkanoyl, arylacyl and alpha-aminoacyl, or alpha-aminoacyl-alpha-aminoacyl, where each alpha-aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, P(O)(OH)₂, —P(O)(O(C₁₋₆)alkyl)₂ or glycosyl (the radical resulting from the removal of a hydroxyl group of the hemiacetal form of a carbohydrate).

For additional examples of prodrug derivatives, see, for example, a) Design of Prodrugs, edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985) and Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 42, p. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et al. (Academic Press, 1985); b) A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Chapter 5 “Design and Application of Prodrugs,” by H. Bundgaard p. 113-191 (1991); c) H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 8:1-38 (1992); d) H. Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77:285 (1988); and e) N. Kakeya, et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull., 32:692 (1984), each of which is specifically incorporated herein by reference.

Additionally, the present invention provides for metabolites of compounds of the invention. As used herein, a “metabolite” refers to a product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof. Such products can result for example from the oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, deamidation, esterification, deesterification, enzymatic cleavage, and the like, of the administered compound.

Metabolite products typically are identified by preparing a radiolabelled (e.g., ¹⁴C or ³H) isotope of a compound of the invention, administering it parenterally in a detectable dose (e.g., greater than about 0.5 mg/kg) to an animal such as rat, mouse, guinea pig, monkey, or to man, allowing sufficient time for metabolism to occur (typically about 30 seconds to 30 hours) and isolating its conversion products from the urine, blood or other biological samples. These products are easily isolated since they are labeled (others are isolated by the use of antibodies capable of binding epitopes surviving in the metabolite). The metabolite structures are determined in conventional fashion, e.g., by Mass Spectrometry (MS), Liquid Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS) or Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) analysis. In general, analysis of metabolites is done in the same way as conventional drug metabolism studies well known to those skilled in the art. The metabolite products, so long as they are not otherwise found in vivo, are useful in diagnostic assays for therapeutic dosing of the compounds of the invention.

Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.

Certain compounds of the present invention possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical centers) or double bonds; the racemates, diastereomers, geometric isomers, regioisomers and individual isomers (e.g., separate enantiomers) are all intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention.

The compounds of the present invention can also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds. For example, the present invention also embraces isotopically-labeled variants of the present invention which are identical to those recited herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having the atomic mass or mass number different from the predominant atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature for the atom. All isotopes of any particular atom or element as specified are contemplated within the scope of the compounds of the invention, and their uses. Exemplary isotopes that can be incorporated in to compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine and iodine, such as ²H (“D”), ³H, ¹¹C, ¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹³N, ¹⁵N, ¹⁵O, ¹⁷O, ¹⁸O, ³²P, ³³P, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F, ³⁶Cl, ¹²³I and ¹²⁵I. Certain isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention (e.g., those labeled with ³H or ¹⁴C) are useful in compound and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated (³H) and carbon-14 (¹⁴C) isotopes are useful for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., ²H) may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability (e.g., increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements) and hence may be preferred in some circumstances. Positron emitting isotopes such as ¹⁵O, ¹³N, ¹¹C, and ¹⁸F are useful for positron emission tomography (PET) studies to examine substrate receptor occupancy. Isotopically labeled compounds of the present inventions can generally be prepared by following procedures analogous to those disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples herein below, by substituting an isotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.

The terms “treat” and “treatment” refer to both therapeutic treatment and/or prophylactic treatment or preventative measures, wherein the object is to prevent or slow down (lessen) an undesired physiological change or disorder, such as, for example, the development or spread of cancer. For purposes of this invention, beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, alleviation of symptoms, diminishment of extent of disease or disorder, stabilized (i.e., not worsening) state of disease or disorder, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state or disorder, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable. “Treatment” can also mean prolonging survival as compared to expected survival if not receiving treatment. Those in need of treatment include those already with the disease or disorder as well as those prone to have the disease or disorder or those in which the disease or disorder is to be prevented.

The phrase “therapeutically effective amount” or “effective amount” means an amount of a compound of the present invention that (i) treats or prevents the particular disease, condition, or disorder, (ii) attenuates, ameliorates, or eliminates one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder, or (iii) prevents or delays the onset of one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder described herein. For cancer therapy, efficacy can, for example, be measured by assessing the time to disease progression (TTP) and/or determining the response rate (RR).

The term “bioavailability” refers to the systemic availability (i.e., blood/plasma levels) of a given amount of drug administered to a patient. Bioavailability is an absolute term that indicates measurement of both the time (rate) and total amount (extent) of drug that reaches the general circulation from an administered dosage form.

A. Compounds

In a first aspect, the present invention provides for compounds of Formula I:

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein in Formula I:

R¹ is selected from the group consisting of a —NR^(1A)R^(1B), —X^(1R)—NR^(1A)R^(1B), —X^(1R)—OR^(1A), 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms and 4-10 membered C-linked heterocycloalkyl comprising 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms; R^(1A) and R^(1B) are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈ alkyl, —C(═Y¹)OR^(R1C), —C(═Y¹)R^(R1C), —C(═Y¹)N(R^(R1C))₂, —(X^(1R))₀₋₁R^(x), and C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(1A) and R^(1B) are optionally combined to form a 4-10 membered heterocyclic ring optionally comprising 1 to 3 additional heteroatoms selected from N, O and S as ring vertices; R^(R1C) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl; X^(1R) is independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene, wherein X^(1R) is optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from oxo and thioxo; Y¹ is independently O or S; R^(x) is independently selected from the group consisting of 6-10 membered aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl and C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl; and wherein R¹ is optionally further substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, C₃₋₈ heterocycloalkyl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, 6-10 membered aryl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, 5-10 membered heteroaryl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —(X^(1R))₀₋₁NR^(R1a)R^(R1b), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁SR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═Y¹)OR^(R1c), —(X¹R)₀₋₁OC(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁C(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═O)R^(R1b), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁C(═O)OR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OC(═O)R^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁—P(═O)(OR^(R1a))(OR^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂R^(R1c), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)) and —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))S(O)₁₋₂(R^(R1c)); R^(R1a) and R^(R1b) are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈alkyl, C-s haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(R1a) and R^(R1b) together with a nitrogen to which they are attached form a morpholino, piperidino, or piperazinyl ring, wherein said ring is optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from C₁₋₈alkyl, halo, hydroxy, C₁₋₈ alkylamino, C₁₋₈ dialkylamino, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl and C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl; R^(R1c) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy;

R^(N) is hydrogen, C₁₋₄ alkyl or C₁₋₄ haloalkyl;

D¹ is N or C(R^(D1));

D³ is N or C(R^(D3));

R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy;

L is a linker selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene, C₂₋₄ alkynylene, and C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, wherein L is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of ═O, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ acyl;

the subscript m represents the integer 0 or 1;

X¹ and X² are each independently selected from the group consisting of absent, —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂— —N(H)—, and —N(R^(x1))— wherein R^(x1) is C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈ acyl or —S(O)₂(C₁₋₈ alkyl), and wherein if the subscript m is 0 then one of X¹ or X² is absent;

the subscript n is an integer from 0 to 5;

A ring represents a 6-10 membered aryl or a 5-10 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S;

R^(A) at each occurrence, is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁, C₃₋₈ halocycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁, C₁₋₈ cyanoalkyl, C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, C₂₋₉ heterocycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, C₆₋₁₀ membered aryl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, —(X^(RA))₀₋₁NR^(A1)R^(A2), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁SR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)OR^(A3), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OC(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)R^(A2), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)R^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)OR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OC(═O)R^(A1), —P(═O)(OR^(A1))(OR^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂R^(A3), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))S(O)₁₋₂(R^(A3)); each X^(RA) is independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene, which C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene is optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from oxo and thioxo; R^(A1) and R^(A2) are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(A1) and R^(A2) together with a nitrogen to which they are attached form a morpholino, piperidino, or piperazinyl ring, which ring is optionally substituted with one or more C₁₋₈alkyl, halo, hydroxy, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl; R^(A3) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; wherein R^(A) is optionally further substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —NH₂, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo (═O), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-S(O)₀₋₂—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, (haloalkyl)₂N—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, haloalkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, (haloalkyl)₂N—C(═O)O—, C₁₋₄ alkylamino, C₁₋₄ dialkylamino, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkoxy, C₂₋₅ heterocycloalkoxy and tetrahydronaphthalene.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is each independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, and —CN.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, one of R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is a 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, one of R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is independently selected from the group consisting of H, F and Cl, or one of R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is a 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, one of R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is a 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, —CN, —CF₃, and pyridyl, wherein said pyridyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, —CN, and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, D¹ is C(R^(D1)) and D³ is C(R^(D3)).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, D¹ is N and D³ is C(R^(D3)).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, D¹ is C(R^(D1)) and D³ is N.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, D¹ and D³ are each N.

In another embodiment, a compound of formula I is a compound of formula Ia:

wherein D¹ is CH or N.

In another embodiment, a compound of formula Ia is a compound of formula Ib

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, one or more of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy; and the remainder of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each H.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, two or more of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy; and the remainder of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is H.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the A ring is a 6-10 membered aryl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the A ring is phenyl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the A ring is a 5-6 membered heteroaryl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the A ring is pyridyl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, wherein n is 2 or 3.

In another embodiment, a compound of formula I is a compound of formula Ic:

wherein D¹ is CH or N; and E is C(R^(A)) or N.

In another embodiment, a compound of formula I is a compound of formula Id:

wherein D¹ is CH or N; and E is C(R^(A)) or N.

In another embodiment, a compound of formula I is a compound of formula Ie:

wherein D¹ is CH or N; and E is C(R^(A)) or N.

In another embodiment, a compound of formula I is a compound of formula If:

wherein; D¹ is CH or N; and E is C(R^(A)) or N.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R¹ is selected from the group consisting of: —NH₂, —NH(CH₃), —N(CH₃)₂,

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R¹ is selected from the group consisting of:

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is —O— or —N(H)—; X² is absent; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene or C₂₋₄ alkynylene and is optionally substituted.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is —O— or —N(H)—; X² is absent; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is selected from the group consisting of —CH₂—, —C(═O)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—C(H₂)—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—CH₂— or —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is —O—; the subscript m is 1 and -(L)- is —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is absent; X² is —O— or —N(H)—; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is selected from the group consisting of —C(H)₂—, —C(═O)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—C(H₂)—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—CH₂— or —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ and X² are absent; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is selected from the group consisting of —C(H)₂—, —C(═O)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—C(H₂)—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—CH₂— or —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ and X² are absent; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is an optionally substituted C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, m is 0; X¹ is selected from —O—, and —N(H)—; and X² is absent.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, 3-5 membered heterocycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —NH₂, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, —C(═O)—N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and —N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is methyl, trifluromethyl, difluoromethyl, monofluoromethyl, ethyl, pentafluoroethyl, cyclopropyl, —F, Cl, —OH, —NH₂ or —CN.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of trifluoromethyl, pentafluoroethoxy, ethyl, isopropyl, 2-fluoroethoxy, fluoromethyl, 3,3-difluorocyclobutyl, cyclobutyl, isopropyl, F, Cl, isopropoxy, trifluoromethoxy and cyclopropyl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, 3 to 5 membered heterocycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —NH₂, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —C(═O)—N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and —N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is H, methyl, trifluromethyl, difluoromethyl, monofluoromethyl, ethyl, pentafluoroethyl, cyclopropyl, —F, Cl, —OH, —NH₂ or —CN.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, trifluoromethyl, pentafluoroethoxy, ethyl, isopropyl, 2-fluoroethoxy, fluoromethyl, 3,3-difluorocyclobutyl, cyclobutyl, isopropyl, F, Cl, isopropoxy, trifluoromethoxy and cyclopropyl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, at least one R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₄ heterocycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —NH₂, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —C(═O)—N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and —N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, at least one R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, at least one R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, trifluromethyl, difluoromethyl, monofluoromethyl, ethyl, pentafluoroethyl, cyclopropyl, —F, Cl, —OH, —NH₂, and —CN.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, at least one R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of trifluoromethyl, pentafluoroethoxy, ethyl, isopropyl, 2-fluoroethoxy, fluoromethyl, 3,3-difluorocyclobutyl, cyclobutyl, isopropyl, F, Cl, isopropoxy, trifluoromethoxy, and cyclopropyl

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, each R^(A) is independently selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl, —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OR^(A1) and —(X^(RA))₀₋₁NR^(A1)R^(A2).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, each R^(A) is independently selected from the group consisting of fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, pentafluoroethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, 2,2-difluorocyclobutyl, 2-methylpropoxy, and piperidino.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the group:

is selected from:

In another embodiment, compounds of formula I are selected from the group consisting of the compounds set forth herein in Table 1 (below) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In another embodiment, the present invention provides for compounds of Formula I:

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein in Formula I:

-   R¹ is selected from the group consisting of a —NR^(1A)R^(1B),     —X^(1R)—NR^(1A)R^(1B), —X^(1R)—OR^(1A), 5-10 membered heteroaryl     ring comprising 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms and 4-10 membered C-linked     heterocycloalkyl comprising 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms; R^(1A) and R^(1B)     are each independently selected from the group consisting of     hydrogen, C₁₋₈ alkyl, —C(═Y¹)OR^(R1C), —C(═Y¹)R^(R1C),     —C(═Y¹)N(R^(R1C))₂, —(X^(1R))₀₋₁R^(x), and C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(1A)     and R^(1B) are optionally combined to form a 4-10 membered     heterocyclic ring optionally comprising 1 to 3 additional     heteroatoms selected from N, O and S as ring vertices; R^(R1C) is     selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl,     C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl and 5-6     membered heteroaryl; X^(1R) is independently selected from the group     consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene     and C₂₋₄ alkynylene, wherein X^(1R) is optionally substituted with     one or more groups selected from oxo and thioxo; Y¹ is independently     O or S; R^(x) is independently selected from the group consisting of     6-10 membered aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl and     C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl; and wherein R¹ is optionally further     substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected     from the group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈     cycloalkyl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, C₃₋₈ heterocycloalkyl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, 6-10     membered aryl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—, 5-10 membered heteroaryl-(X^(1R))₀₋₁—,     F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —(X^(1R))₀₋₁NR^(R1a)R^(R1b),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OR^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁SR^(R1a),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═Y)OR^(R1c),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OC(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁C(═O)N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))C(═O)R^(R1b), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁C(═O)OR^(R1a),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁OC(═O)R^(R1a), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁—P(═O)(OR^(R1a))(OR^(R1b)),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂R^(R1c), —(X^(1R))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)),     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(R1a))(R^(R1b)) and     —(X^(1R))₀₋₁N(R^(R1a))S(O)₁₋₂(R^(R1c)); R^(R1a) and R^(R1b) are each     independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,     C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈     cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy,     tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy,     5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C-s alkyl, 5-6     membered heteroaryl-C₁ s alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7     membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered     heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(R1a) and R^(R1b) together with a     nitrogen to which they are attached form a morpholino, piperidino,     or piperazinyl ring, wherein said ring is optionally substituted     with one or more groups independently selected from C₁₋₈alkyl, halo,     hydroxy, C₁₋₈ alkylamino, C₁₋₈ dialkylamino, C₁₋₈haloalkyl and C₁₋₈     hydroxyalkyl; R^(R1c) is selected from the group consisting of     C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈     cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy,     tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy,     5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6     membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7     membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered     heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; -   R^(N) is hydrogen, C₁₋₄ alkyl or C₁₋₄ haloalkyl; -   D¹ is N or C(R^(D1)); -   D³ is N or C(R^(D3)); -   R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each independently selected     from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₂₋₈     alkenyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇     heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to     3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered     heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3     substituents selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄     haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy and said C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl is further     optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F     and —OH; -   L is a linker selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene,     C₂₋₄ alkenylene, C₂₋₄ alkynylene, and C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, wherein L     is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents     independently selected from the group consisting of ═O, C₁₋₄ alkyl,     C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ acyl; -   the subscript m represents the integer 0 or 1; -   X¹ and X² are each independently selected from the group consisting     of absent, —O—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂— —N(H)—, and —N(R^(x1))— wherein     R^(x1) is C₁₋₈alkyl, C₁₋₈ acyl or —S(O)₂(C₁₋₈ alkyl), and wherein if     the subscript m is 0 then one of X¹ or X² is absent; -   the subscript n is an integer from 0 to 5; -   A ring represents a 6-10 membered aryl or a 5-10 membered heteroaryl     comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S; -   R^(A) at each occurrence, is independently selected from the group     consisting of H, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈     cycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁, C₃₋₈ halocycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁, C₁₋₈     cyanoalkyl, C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, F, Cl, Br,     I, —CN, —NO₂, C₂₋₉ heterocycloalkyl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, C₆₋₁₀ membered     aryl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-(X^(RA))₀₋₁—,     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁NR^(A1)R^(A2), —(X^(A1))₀₋₁OR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁SR^(A1),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)OR^(A3),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OC(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))C(═O)R^(A2), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)R^(A1),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁C(═O)OR^(A1), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁OC(═O)R^(A1),     —P(═O)(OR^(A1))(OR^(A2)), —(X^(RA))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂R^(A3),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)),     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))S(O)₁₋₂N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and     —(X^(RA))₀₋₁N(R^(A1))S(O)₁₋₂(R^(A3)); each X^(RA) is independently     selected from the group consisting of C₁₋₄ alkylene, C₁₋₄     heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene, which C₁₋₄     alkylene, C₁₋₄ heteroalkylene, C₂₋₄ alkenylene and C₂₋₄ alkynylene     is optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from oxo     and thioxo; R^(A1) and R^(A2) are independently selected from the     group consisting of hydrogen, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈     hydroxyalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkyl, C₃₋₈     cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈alkoxy, tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈     alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered     heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7     membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl,     3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; or R^(A1) and R^(A2)     together with a nitrogen to which they are attached form a     morpholino, piperidino, or piperazinyl ring, which ring is     optionally substituted with one or more C₁₋₈alkyl, halo, hydroxy,     C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, and C₁₋₈ hydroxyalkyl; R^(A3) is selected from the     group consisting of C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl,     C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy,     tetrahydronapthalene, phenyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, phenyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy,     5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 5-6     membered heteroaryl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy, 3-7 membered heterocycloalkyl, 3-7     membered heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkyl, 3-7 membered     heterocycloalkyl-C₁₋₈ alkoxy; wherein R^(A) is optionally further     substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents independently selected     from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —NH₂, —OH, —CN, —NO₂, oxo     (═O), C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-C(═O)—,     C₁₋₄haloalkyl-S(O)₀₋₂—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-C(═O)N(H)—,     C₁₋₄haloalkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, (haloalkyl)₂N—C(═O)—,     C₁₋₄haloalkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C₁₋₄haloalkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—,     haloalkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, (haloalkyl)₂N—C(═O)O—, C₁₋₄ alkylamino, C₁₋₄     dialkylamino, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkoxy, C₂₋₅     heterocycloalkoxy and tetrahydronaphthalene.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, —CN, C₂₋₈ alkenyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy and said C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F and —OH.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(D1), R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, —CN, vinyl, cyclopropyl, oxetanyl, and pyridyl, wherein said pyridyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy and said oxetanyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F and —OH. Within certain aspects of this embodiment, R^(D1), R^(D3) are each H, R^(D2) is F or Cl and R^(D4) is vinyl, cyclopropyl, oxetanyl, or pyridyl, wherein said pyridyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy and said oxetanyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F and —OH.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, one or more of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₂₋₈ alkenyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy, and said C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F and —OH; and the remainder of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each H.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, two or more of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) are each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, —CN, C₂₋₈ alkenyl, C₁₋₈ alkyl, C₁₋₈ haloalkyl, C₁₋₈ alkoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl, phenyl and 5-6 membered heteroaryl comprising 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S, wherein said 5-6 membered heteroaryl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl and C₁₋₄ alkoxy and said C₂₋₇ heterocycloalkyl is further optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from F and —OH; and the remainder of R^(D2), R^(D3) and R^(D4) is H.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the A ring is phenyl, pyridyl, isoxazolyl, naphthyl, indolyl, isoquinolinyl, indazolyl, benzothiazolyl or quinolinyl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the A ring is phenyl or pyridyl.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R¹ is selected from the group consisting of: —NH₂, —NH(CH₃), —N(CH₃)₂,

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R¹ is selected from the group consisting of: —NH(CH₃), —N(CH₃)₂, and

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is absent; X² is —O—; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is-CH₂—, or —CH₂—CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is —O—; X² is —O—; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is selected from the group consisting of —C(H)₂—, —C(═O)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—C(H₂)—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—CH₂— or —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, X¹ is —O—; X² is —O—; the subscript m is 1; and -(L)- is selected from the group consisting of —CH₂—CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—, —C(H)(CH₃)—C(H₂)—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂—C(H)(CH₃)—CH₂— or —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, m is 0; X¹ is —O—; and X² is absent.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, C₃₋₅ cycloalkyl, 3 to 6 membered heterocycloalkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, phenyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, C₃₋₅ halocycloalkyl, F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —NH₂, —CN, —NO₂, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —S(O)₁₋₂R^(A3), —C(═O)—N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)) and —N(R^(A1))(R^(A2)).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, 3 to 6 membered heterocycloalkyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, phenyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, Cl, —CN, C₁₋₄alkoxy and —S(O)₁₋₂R^(A3).

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, trifluoromethyl, Cl, —OCH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —OCF₃, —OCH₂CF₂CHF₂, methyl, phenyl, —CN, thiazol-2-yl, methoxy, —SO₂CH₃, piperdin-1-yl, —OCH(CH₃)₂ and OCH₂CF₃.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, R^(A) is selected from the group consisting of H, trifluoromethyl, Cl, —OCF₃, —OCH₂CF₂CHF₂, —OCH(CH₃)₂ and OCH₂CF₃.

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the group:

is selected from:

In another embodiment, in compounds of formula I, the group:

is selected from:

It is to be understood that two or more of the embodiments of compounds of formula I described herein above may combined with each other.

In another embodiment, compounds of formula I are selected from the group consisting of the compounds set forth herein in Table 2 (below) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

Synthesis of Compounds

Compounds of formula (I), wherein X¹ is O, S, NH may be prepared by the process illustrated in Scheme 1.

Compounds of formula (I) can be made from compounds of formula (IV) by displacement of fluorine with compounds of formula (V) using a base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran as described in the reaction step (ii) in Scheme 1. Formula (IV) can be made according to reaction step (i) as described in Scheme 1 by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (II) with reagents such as thionyl chloride, oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (III) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU), N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine.

Alternatively, compounds of formula (I) can be made according to step (vi) in Scheme 1 by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (VIII) with reagents such as oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (III) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as DBU, N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine.

Compounds of formula (VIII) can be prepared according to the reaction step (v) by hydrolysis of the ester functional group in compounds of formula (VII) by either acidic or basic methods using deprotecting group methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’.

Compounds of formula (VII) can be made from compounds of formula (VI) according to step (iv) by displacement of the fluorine substituent with compounds of formula (V) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran.

Alternately, compounds of formula (VII) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XII) and compounds of formula (XI) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran according to the reaction step (ix) in Scheme 1. Further, compounds of formula (XI) can be prepared from compounds of formula (X) by the process of removing the functional group Z as described in the reaction step (viii) using deprotecting methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’. Compounds of formula (X) can be prepared from compounds of formula (VI) according to the reaction step (vii) by displacement of the fluorine substituent with compounds of formula (IX) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran. Compound of formula (VI) can be made from the benzoic acid compounds of formula (II) using protecting methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein X¹ is absent and (L)_(m) is CH₂ can be prepared via reactions steps (xiv) or (xx) as described in Scheme 2.

In the reaction step (xiv) compounds of formula (I) can be made from compounds of formula (XVII) and compounds of formula (III) using a palladium-catalyzed carbonylation reactions conditions. Suitable palladium-catalyzed carbonylation conditions such as but not limited to palladium (II) acetate or dichlorobistriphenylphosphine palladium (II) with a ligand such as but not limited to XANTPHOS or dppf, a base such as but not limited to triethylamine, pyridine or diisopropylethylamine under pressure of carbon monoxide gas or Molybdenum hexacarbonyl (Mo(CO)₆) as a source of carbon monoxide gas in solvent such as methanol or methanol in dioxane. Compound of formula (XVII) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XVI) according to the reaction step (xiii) by displacement of the leaving group (Lg) with compounds of formula (V) using a suitable base such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate or cesium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide or N,N-dimethylformamide. Treatment of compounds of formula (XV) with methanesulfonyl chloride or tosyl chloride in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine, Hunig base or pyridine in a suitable solvent such as dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran affords compounds of formula (XVI) as described in the reaction step (xii) as shown in Scheme 2. Further, compounds of formula (XV) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XIV) by treating with a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride, lithium borohydride or aluminum hydride in the presence of solvents such as methanol, tetrahydrofuran or 1,4-dioxane as depicted in the reaction step (xi).

Compound of formula (XIV) can be made from the benzoic acid compounds of formula (XIII) using protecting methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’.

Alternatively, compounds of formula (1) wherein X¹ is absent and (L)_(m) is CH₂ can be made according to step (xx) in Scheme 2 by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (XXIV) with reagents such as oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (III) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as DBU, N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine. Compounds of formula (XXIV) can be synthesized according to the reaction step (xix) by hydrolysis of the ester functional group in compounds of formula (XXIII) by either acidic or basic methods using deprotecting group methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’. Compounds of formula (XXIII) can be made from compounds of formula (XXI) according to the reaction step (xviii) by displacement of the leaving group (Lg) with compounds of formula (XXII) using a suitable base such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate or cesium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide or N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (XXI) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XV) in four steps (reaction steps xv, xvi, xvii and xviii) as depicted in scheme 2. Protecting the hydroxyl functional group in the compounds of formula (XV) using protecting methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’ affords compounds of formula (XVIII). In the reaction step (xvi) compound of formula (XIX) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XVIII) using palladium-catalyzed carbonylation conditions. Suitable palladium-catalyzed carbonylation conditions such as but not limited to palladium (II) acetate or dichlorobistriphenylphosphine palladium (II) with a ligand such as but not limited to XANTPHOS or dppf, a base such as but not limited to triethylamine, pyridine or diisopropylethylamine under pressure of carbon monoxide gas in solvent such a methanol or a mixture of dioxane and methanol. Compounds of formula (XX) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XIX) using deprotecting methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’. Treatment of compounds of formula (XX) with methanesulfonyl chloride or tosyl chloride in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine, Hunig base or pyridine in a suitable solvent such as dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran affords compounds of formula (XXI) as described in the reaction step (xvii) as shown in Scheme 2.

Alternatively, compounds of formula (XXIII) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XXII) according to the reaction step (xvii) by displacement of the leaving group (Lg) with compounds of formula (XXII) using a suitable base such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate or cesium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide or N,N-dimethylformamide. Alternately, compounds of formula (XXIII) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XXV) via steps (xxi) and (xxii) as shown in Scheme 2. Compounds of formula (XXV) can be converted to compounds of formula (XXVI) using N-bromosuccinimide in the presence of a radical initiator in a solvent such as acetonitrile. Treating compounds of formula (XXVI) with compounds of formula (XXII) according to the reaction step (xxii) using a suitable base such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate or cesium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide or N,N-dimethylformamide affords compounds of formula (XXIII).

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R₅ is Aryl or Heteroaryl can be prepared by the process illustrated in Scheme 3.

Compounds of formula (I) can be made from compounds of formula (XXVII) according to step (xxxi) by displacement of the fluorine substituent with compounds of formula (V) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran. Compounds of formula (XXVII) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XXIX) and compounds of formula (XXVIII) by palladium-catalyzed reactions using a suitable catalyst such as tetrakistriphenylphosphine palladium(0) and a base such a sodium carbonate in a solvent such a dioxane or dimethoxyethane. Compounds of formula (XXIX) can be made according to step (xxix) in Scheme 3 by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (XXX) with reagents such as oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (III) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as DBU, N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine in a suitable solvent such a tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide.

Alternately, compounds of formula (I) wherein R₅ is Aryl or Heteroaryl can be made according to step (xxvi) as described in Scheme 3 by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (XXXIV) with reagents such as oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (III) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as DBU, N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine in a suitable solvent such a tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (XXXIV) can be prepared according to the reaction step (xxv) by hydrolysis of the ester functional group in compounds of formula (XXXIII) by either acidic or basic methods using deprotecting group methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’. Compounds of formula (XXXIII) can be prepared in two separate routes as described in Scheme 3. Compounds of formula (XXXIII) can be made from compounds of formula (XXXVI) according to step (xxiv) by displacement of the fluorine substituent with compounds of formula (V) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran. Compounds of formula (XXVI) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XXXI) and compounds of formula (XXVIII) as described in reaction step (xxiii) by palladium-catalyzed reactions using a suitable catalyst such as tetrakistriphenylphosphine palladium(0) and a base such a sodium carbonate in a solvent such a dioxane or dimethoxyethane. Compounds of formula (XXXI) can be made from the benzoic acid compounds of formula (XXX) using protecting methodology as described in references such as ‘Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis’.

Alternately, compounds of formula (XXXIII) can be prepared from compounds of formula (XXXII) and compounds of formula (XXVIII) as described in reaction step (xxviii) by using palladium-catalyzed reactions conditions using a suitable catalyst such as tetrakistriphenylphosphine palladium(0) and a base such a sodium carbonate in a solvent such a dioxane or dimethoxyethane. Compounds of formula (XXXII) can be made from compounds of formula (XXXI) according to reaction step (xxvii) by displacement of the fluorine substituent with compounds of formula (V) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ is a —NHR^(1A) can be made according to reaction step (xxxi) as described in Scheme 4 by alkylation of compounds of formula (XXXVII) with compounds of formula (XXXVIII) using a suitable base such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate or lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (LHMDS) in a suitable solvent such a tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (XXXVII) can be made from compounds of formula (XXXVI) according to reaction step (xxx) by displacement of the fluorine substituent with compounds of formula (V) using a suitable base such as potassium tert-butoxide, sodium hydride or potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as dimethylsulfoxide, N,N-dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran. Compounds of formula (XXXVI) can be made as described in the reaction step (xxix) by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (II) with reagents such as oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (XXXV) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as DBU, N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine in a suitable solvent such a tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide. Alternatively, compounds of formula (XXXVII) can be made as described in step (xxxii) by activation of the benzoic acid group of formula (VIII) with reagents such as oxalyl chloride, carbonyl di-imidazole (CDI), propylphosphonic anhydride, a uronium based amide coupling agent or a carbodiimide reagent followed by displacement with a sulfonamide of formula (XXXV) in the presence of a nucleophilic base such as DBU, N, N-diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine in a suitable solvent such a tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine in a suitable solvent such a tetrahydrofuran or N,N-dimethylformamide.

B. Pharmaceutical Compositions and Administration

In addition to one or more of the compounds provided above (or stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, or prodrugs thereof), the invention also provides for compositions and medicaments comprising a compound of Formula I or and embodiment thereof and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient. The compositions of the invention can be used to selectively inhibit NaV1.7 in patients (e.g., humans).

The term “composition,” as used herein, is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. By “pharmaceutically acceptable” it is meant the carrier, diluent or excipient must be compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not deleterious to the recipient thereof.

In one embodiment, the invention provides for pharmaceutical compositions (or medicaments) comprising a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof, and its stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, or prodrugs thereof) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient. In another embodiment, the invention provides for preparing compositions (or medicaments) comprising compounds of the invention. In another embodiment, the invention provides for administering compounds of Formula I or its embodiments and compositions comprising compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof to a patient (e.g., a human patient) in need thereof.

Compositions are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners. The effective amount of the compound to be administered will be governed by such considerations, and is the minimum amount necessary to inhibit NaV1.7 activity as required to prevent or treat the undesired disease or disorder, such as for example, pain. For example, such amount may be below the amount that is toxic to normal cells, or the mammal as a whole.

In one example, the therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the invention administered parenterally per dose will be in the range of about 0.01-100 mg/kg, alternatively about e.g., 0.1 to 20 mg/kg of patient body weight per day, with the typical initial range of compound used being 0.3 to 15 mg/kg/day. The daily does is, in certain embodiments, given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form. In the case of a 70 kg adult human, the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 mg to about 1,400 mg. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response. The compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.

The compounds of the present invention may be administered in any convenient administrative form, e.g., tablets, powders, capsules, solutions, dispersions, suspensions, syrups, sprays, suppositories, gels, emulsions, patches, etc. Such compositions may contain components conventional in pharmaceutical preparations, e.g., diluents, carriers, pH modifiers, sweeteners, bulking agents, and further active agents.

The compounds of the invention may be administered by any suitable means, including oral, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal, transdermal, parenteral, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intradermal, intrathecal and epidural and intranasal, and, if desired for local treatment, intralesional administration. Parenteral infusions include intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intraocular, intralesional or subcutaneous administration.

The compositions comprising compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof are normally formulated in accordance with standard pharmaceutical practice as a pharmaceutical composition. A typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of the present invention and a diluent, carrier or excipient. Suitable diluents, carriers and excipients are well known to those skilled in the art and are described in detail in, e.g., Ansel, Howard C., et al., Ansel's Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2004; Gennaro, Alfonso R., et al. Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2000; and Rowe, Raymond C. Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients. Chicago, Pharmaceutical Press, 2005. The formulations may also include one or more buffers, stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents, diluents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).

Suitable carriers, diluents and excipients are well known to those skilled in the art and include materials such as carbohydrates, waxes, water soluble and/or swellable polymers, hydrophilic or hydrophobic materials, gelatin, oils, solvents, water and the like. The particular carrier, diluent or excipient used will depend upon the means and purpose for which a compound of the present invention is being applied. Solvents are generally selected based on solvents recognized by persons skilled in the art as safe (GRAS) to be administered to a mammal. In general, safe solvents are non-toxic aqueous solvents such as water and other non-toxic solvents that are soluble or miscible in water. Suitable aqueous solvents include water, ethanol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG 400, PEG 300), etc. and mixtures thereof. The formulations can also include one or more buffers, stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).

Acceptable diluents, carriers, excipients and stabilizers are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid and methionine; preservatives (such as octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride; hexamethonium chloride; benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride; phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol; alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben; catechol; resorcinol; cyclohexanol; 3-pentanol; and m-cresol); low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, histidine, arginine, or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugars such as sucrose, mannitol, trehalose or sorbitol; salt-forming counter-ions such as sodium; metal complexes (e.g., Zn-protein complexes); and/or non-ionic surfactants such as TWEEN™, PLURONICS™ or polyethylene glycol (PEG). A active pharmaceutical ingredient of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) can also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy: Remington the Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2005) 21^(st) Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, Pa.

Sustained-release preparations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) can be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained-release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinyl alcohol)), polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al., Biopolymers 22:547, 1983), non-degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 15:167, 1981), degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as the LUPRON DEPOT™ (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate) and poly-D-(−)-3-hydroxybutyric acid (EP 133,988A). Sustained release compositions also include liposomally entrapped compounds, which can be prepared by methods known per se (Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:3688, 1985; Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4030, 1980; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324A). Ordinarily, the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamellar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol % cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal therapy.

The formulations include those suitable for the administration routes detailed herein. The formulations can conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and can be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy: Remington the Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2005) 21^(st) Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, Pa. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients.

In general the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers, diluents or excipients or finely divided solid carriers, diluents or excipients, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product. A typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of the present invention and a carrier, diluent or excipient. The formulations can be prepared using conventional dissolution and mixing procedures. For example, the bulk drug substance (i.e., compound of the present invention or stabilized form of the compound (e.g., complex with a cyclodextrin derivative or other known complexation agent) is dissolved in a suitable solvent in the presence of one or more of the excipients described above. A compound of the present invention is typically formulated into pharmaceutical dosage forms to provide an easily controllable dosage of the drug and to enable patient compliance with the prescribed regimen.

In one example, compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof may be formulated by mixing at ambient temperature at the appropriate pH, and at the desired degree of purity, with physiologically acceptable carriers, i.e., carriers that are non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed into a galenical administration form. The pH of the formulation depends mainly on the particular use and the concentration of compound, but preferably ranges anywhere from about 3 to about 8. In one example, a compound of Formula I (or an embodiment thereof) is formulated in an acetate buffer, at pH 5. In another embodiment, the compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof are sterile. The compound may be stored, for example, as a solid or amorphous composition, as a lyophilized formulation or as an aqueous solution.

Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) suitable for oral administration can be prepared as discrete units such as pills, capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the invention.

Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered active ingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets can optionally be coated or scored and optionally are formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therefrom.

Tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, e.g., gelatin capsules, syrups or elixirs can be prepared for oral use. Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) intended for oral use can be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions can contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation. Tablets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable. These excipients can be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. Tablets can be uncoated or can be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax can be employed.

An example of a suitable oral administration form is a tablet containing about 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, 50 mg, 80 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 250 mg, 300 mg and 500 mg of the compound of the invention compounded with about 90-30 mg anhydrous lactose, about 5-40 mg sodium croscarmellose, about 5-30 mg polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) K30, and about 1-10 mg magnesium stearate. The powdered ingredients are first mixed together and then mixed with a solution of the PVP. The resulting composition can be dried, granulated, mixed with the magnesium stearate and compressed to tablet form using conventional equipment. An example of an aerosol formulation can be prepared by dissolving the compound, for example 5-400 mg, of the invention in a suitable buffer solution, e.g. a phosphate buffer, adding a tonicifier, e.g. a salt such sodium chloride, if desired. The solution may be filtered, e.g., using a 0.2 micron filter, to remove impurities and contaminants.

For treatment of the eye or other external tissues, e.g., mouth and skin, the formulations are preferably applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w. When formulated in an ointment, the active ingredient can be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients can be formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base. If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base can include a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400) and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations can desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulfoxide and related analogs.

The oily phase of the emulsions of this invention can be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phase can comprise merely an emulsifier, it desirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations. Emulsifiers and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the invention include Tween® 60, Span® 80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.

In one aspect of topical applications, it is desired to administer an effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition according to the invention to target area, e.g., skin surfaces, mucous membranes, and the like, which are adjacent to peripheral neurons which are to be treated. This amount will generally range from about 0.0001 mg to about 1 g of a compound of the invention per application, depending upon the area to be treated, whether the use is diagnostic, prophylactic or therapeutic, the severity of the symptoms, and the nature of the topical vehicle employed. A preferred topical preparation is an ointment, wherein about 0.001 to about 50 mg of active ingredient is used per cc of ointment base. The pharmaceutical composition can be formulated as transdermal compositions or transdermal delivery devices (“patches”). Such compositions include, for example, a backing, active compound reservoir, a control membrane, liner and contact adhesive. Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous pulsatile, or on demand delivery of the compounds of the present invention as desired.

Aqueous suspensions of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, croscarmellose, povidone, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate). The aqueous suspension can also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.

Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) can be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. This suspension can be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above. The sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1,3-butanediol or prepared as a lyophilized powder. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile fixed oils can conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid can likewise be used in the preparation of injectables.

The amount of active ingredient that can be combined with the carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. For example, a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans can contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which can vary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions (weight:weight). The pharmaceutical composition can be prepared to provide easily measurable amounts for administration. For example, an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion can contain from about 3 to 500 μg of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr can occur.

Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous sterile injection solutions which can contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which can include suspending agents and thickening agents.

Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active ingredient. The active ingredient is preferably present in such formulations in a concentration of about 0.5 to 20% w/w, for example about 0.5 to 10% w/w, for example about 1.5% w/w.

Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.

Formulations for rectal administration can be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.

Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administration have a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 microns (including particle sizes in a range between 0.1 and 500 microns in increments microns such as 0.5, 1, 30 microns, 35 microns, etc.), which is administered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or by inhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs. Suitable formulations include aqueous or oily solutions of the active ingredient. Formulations suitable for aerosol or dry powder administration can be prepared according to conventional methods and can be delivered with other therapeutic agents such as compounds heretofore used in the treatment of disorders as described below.

The formulations can be packaged in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, for example sealed ampoules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water, for injection immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions are prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described. Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.

When the binding target is located in the brain, certain embodiments of the invention provide for a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) to traverse the blood-brain barrier. Certain neurodegenerative diseases are associated with an increase in permeability of the blood-brain barrier, such that a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) can be readily introduced to the brain. When the blood-brain barrier remains intact, several art-known approaches exist for transporting molecules across it, including, but not limited to, physical methods, lipid-based methods, and receptor and channel-based methods.

Physical methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, circumventing the blood-brain barrier entirely, or by creating openings in the blood-brain barrier.

Circumvention methods include, but are not limited to, direct injection into the brain (see, e.g., Papanastassiou et al., Gene Therapy 9:398-406, 2002), interstitial infusion/convection-enhanced delivery (see, e.g., Bobo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91:2076-2080, 1994), and implanting a delivery device in the brain (see, e.g., Gill et al., Nature Med. 9:589-595, 2003; and Gliadel Wafers™, Guildford.

Pharmaceutical). Methods of creating openings in the barrier include, but are not limited to, ultrasound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0038086), osmotic pressure (e.g., by administration of hypertonic mannitol (Neuwelt, E. A., Implication of the Blood-Brain Barrier and its Manipulation, Volumes 1 and 2, Plenum Press, N.Y., 1989)), and permeabilization by, e.g., bradykinin or permeabilizer A-7 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,112,596, 5,268,164, 5,506,206, and 5,686,416).

Lipid-based methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, encapsulating the a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) in liposomes that are coupled to antibody binding fragments that bind to receptors on the vascular endothelium of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2002/0025313), and coating a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) in low-density lipoprotein particles (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0204354) or apolipoprotein E (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0131692).

Receptor and channel-based methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, using glucocorticoid blockers to increase permeability of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2002/0065259, 2003/0162695, and 2005/0124533); activating potassium channels (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0089473), inhibiting ABC drug transporters (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0073713); coating a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) with a transferrin and modulating activity of the one or more transferrin receptors (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0129186), and cationizing the antibodies (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,004,697).

For intracerebral use, in certain embodiments, the compounds can be administered continuously by infusion into the fluid reservoirs of the CNS, although bolus injection may be acceptable. The inhibitors can be administered into the ventricles of the brain or otherwise introduced into the CNS or spinal fluid. Administration can be performed by use of an indwelling catheter and a continuous administration means such as a pump, or it can be administered by implantation, e.g., intracerebral implantation of a sustained-release vehicle. More specifically, the inhibitors can be injected through chronically implanted cannulas or chronically infused with the help of osmotic minipumps. Subcutaneous pumps are available that deliver proteins through a small tubing to the cerebral ventricles. Highly sophisticated pumps can be refilled through the skin and their delivery rate can be set without surgical intervention. Examples of suitable administration protocols and delivery systems involving a subcutaneous pump device or continuous intracerebroventricular infusion through a totally implanted drug delivery system are those used for the administration of dopamine, dopamine agonists, and cholinergic agonists to Alzheimer's disease patients and animal models for Parkinson's disease, as described by Harbaugh, J. Neural Transm. Suppl. 24:271, 1987; and DeYebenes et al., Mov. Disord. 2: 143, 1987.

A compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) used in the invention are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners. A compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) need not be, but is optionally formulated with one or more agent currently used to prevent or treat the disorder in question. The effective amount of such other agents depends on the amount of a compound of the invention present in the formulation, the type of disorder or treatment, and other factors discussed above.

These are generally used in the same dosages and with administration routes as described herein, or about from 1 to 99% of the dosages described herein, or in any dosage and by any route that is empirically/clinically determined to be appropriate.

For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate dosage of a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) (when used alone or in combination with other agents) will depend on the type of disease to be treated, the properties of the compound, the severity and course of the disease, whether the compound is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the compound, and the discretion of the attending physician. The compound is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments. Depending on the type and severity of the disease, about 1 μg/kg to 15 mg/kg (e.g., 0.1 mg/kg-10 mg/kg) of compound can be an initial candidate dosage for administration to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion. One typical daily dosage might range from about 1 μg kg to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned above. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment would generally be sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. One exemplary dosage of a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) would be in the range from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg. Thus, one or more doses of about 0.5 mg/kg, 2.0 mg/kg, 4.0 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg (or any combination thereof) may be administered to the patient. Such doses may be administered intermittently, e.g., every week or every three weeks (e.g., such that the patient receives from about two to about twenty, or, e.g., about six doses of the antibody). An initial higher loading dose, followed by one or more lower doses may be administered. An exemplary dosing regimen comprises administering an initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by a weekly maintenance dose of about 2 mg kg of the compound. However, other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.

Other typical daily dosages might range from, for example, about 1 g/kg to up to 100 mg/kg or more (e.g., about 1 μg kg to 1 mg/kg, about 1 μg/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 1 mg kg to 10 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, about 50 mg/kg to about 150 mg/mg, about 100 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg, and about 200 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg), depending on the factors mentioned above. Typically, the clinician will administer a compound until a dosage is reached that results in improvement in or, optimally, elimination of, one or more symptoms of the treated disease or condition. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional assays. One or more agent provided herein may be administered together or at different times (e.g., one agent is administered prior to the administration of a second agent). One or more agent may be administered to a subject using different techniques (e.g., one agent may be administered orally, while a second agent is administered via intramuscular injection or intranasally). One or more agent may be administered such that the one or more agent has a pharmacologic effect in a subject at the same time. Alternatively, one or more agent may be administered, such that the pharmacological activity of the first administered agent is expired prior the administration of one or more secondarily administered agents (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 secondarily administered agents).

C. Indications and Methods of Treatment

The compounds of the invention modulate, preferably inhibit, ion flux through a voltage-dependent sodium channel in a mammal, (e.g., a human). Any such modulation, whether it be partial or complete inhibition or prevention of ion flux, is sometimes referred to herein as “blocking” and corresponding compounds as “blockers” or “inhibitors”. In general, the compounds of the invention modulate the activity of a sodium channel downwards by inhibiting the voltage-dependent activity of the sodium channel, and/or reduce or prevent sodium ion flux across a cell membrane by preventing sodium channel activity such as ion flux.

The compounds of the invention inhibit the ion flux through a voltage-dependent sodium channel. In one aspect, the compounds are state or frequency dependent modifiers of the sodium channels, having a low affinity for the rested/closed state and a high affinity for the inactivated state. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is thought that these compounds are likely to interact with overlapping sites located in the inner cavity of the sodium conducting pore of the channel similar to that described for other state-dependent sodium channel blockers (Cestele, S., et al., op. cit.). These compounds may also be likely to interact with sites outside of the inner cavity and have allosteric effects on sodium ion conduction through the channel pore.

Any of these consequences may ultimately be responsible for the overall therapeutic benefit provided by these compounds.

Accordingly, the compounds of the invention are sodium channel blockers and are therefore useful for treating diseases and conditions in mammals, for example humans, and other organisms, including all those diseases and conditions which are the result of aberrant voltage-dependent sodium channel biological activity or which may be ameliorated by modulation of voltage-dependent sodium channel biological activity. In particular, the compounds of the invention, i.e., the compounds of formula (I) and embodiments and (or stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, or prodrugs thereof), are useful for treating diseases and conditions in mammals, for example humans, which are the result of aberrant voltage-dependent NaV1.7 biological activity or which may be ameliorated by the modulation, preferably the inhibition, of NaV1.7 biological activity. In certain aspects, the compounds of the invention selectively inhibit NaV1.7 over NaV1.5.

As defined herein, a sodium channel-mediated disease or condition refers to a disease or condition in a mammal, preferably a human, which is ameliorated upon modulation of the sodium channel and includes, but is not limited to, pain, central nervous conditions such as epilepsy, anxiety, depression and bipolar disease; cardiovascular conditions such as arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation; neuromuscular conditions such as restless leg syndrome and muscle paralysis or tetanus; neuroprotection against stroke, neural trauma and multiple sclerosis; and channelopathies such as erythromyalgia and familial rectal pain syndrome.

In one aspect, the present invention relates to compounds, pharmaceutical compositions and methods of using the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of sodium channel-mediated diseases in mammals, preferably humans and preferably diseases and conditions related to pain, central nervous conditions such as epilepsy, anxiety, depression and bipolar disease; cardiovascular conditions such as arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation; neuromuscular conditions such as restless leg syndrome and muscle paralysis or tetanus; neuroprotection against stroke, neural trauma and multiple sclerosis; and channelopathies such as erythromyalgia and familial rectal pain syndrome, by administering to a mammal, for example a human, in need of such treatment an effective amount of a sodium channel blocker modulating, especially inhibiting, agent.

A sodium channel-mediated disease or condition also includes pain associated with HIV, HIV treatment induced neuropathy, trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, neuropathy secondary to metastatic infiltration, adiposis dolorosa, thalamic lesions, hypertension, autoimmune disease, asthma, drug addiction (e.g., opiate, benzodiazepine, amphetamine, cocaine, alcohol, butane inhalation), Alzheimer, dementia, age-related memory impairment, Korsakoff syndrome, restenosis, urinary dysfunction, incontinence, Parkinson's disease, cerebrovascular ischemia, neurosis, gastrointestinal disease, sickle cell anemia, transplant rejection, heart failure, myocardial infarction, reperfusion injury, intermittent claudication, angina, convulsion, respiratory disorders, cerebral or myocardial ischemias, long-QT syndrome, Catecholeminergic polymorphic ventricular tachycardia, ophthalmic diseases, spasticity, spastic paraplegia, myopathies, myasthenia gravis, paramyotonia congentia, hyperkalemic periodic paralysis, hypokalemic periodic paralysis, alopecia, anxiety disorders, psychotic disorders, mania, paranoia, seasonal affective disorder, panic disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD), phobias, autism, Aspergers Syndrome, Retts syndrome, disintegrative disorder, attention deficit disorder, aggressivity, impulse control disorders, thrombosis, preeclampsia, congestive cardiac failure, cardiac arrest, Freidrich's ataxia, Spinocerebellear ataxia, myelopathy, radiculopathy, systemic lupus erythamatosis, granulomatous disease, olivo-ponto-cerebellar atrophy, spinocerebellar ataxia, episodic ataxia, myokymia, progressive pallidal atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy and spasticity, traumatic brain injury, cerebral oedema, hydrocephalus injury, spinal cord injury, anorexia nervosa, bulimia, Prader-Willi syndrome, obesity, optic neuritis, cataract, retinal haemorrhage, ischaemic retinopathy, retinitis pigmentosa, acute and chronic glaucoma, macular degeneration, retinal artery occlusion, Chorea, Huntington's chorea, cerebral edema, proctitis, post-herpetic neuralgia, eudynia, heat sensitivity, sarcoidosis, irritable bowel syndrome, Tourette syndrome, Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome, Brugado syndrome, Liddle syndrome, Crohns disease, multiple sclerosis and the pain associated with multiple sclerosis (MS), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), disseminated sclerosis, diabetic neuropathy, peripheral neuropathy, Charcot Marie Tooth syndrome, arthritic, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, chondrocalcinosis, atherosclerosis, paroxysmal dystonia, myasthenia syndromes, myotonia, myotonic dystrophy, muscular dystrophy, malignant hyperthermia, cystic fibrosis, pseudoaldosteronism, rhabdomyolysis, mental handicap, hypothyroidism, bipolar depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, sodium channel toxin related illnesses, familial erythromelalgia, primary erythromelalgia, rectal pain, cancer, epilepsy, partial and general tonic seizures, febrile seizures, absence seizures (petit mal), myoclonic seizures, atonic seizures, clonic seizures, Lennox Gastaut, West Syndrome (infantile spasms), multiresistant seizures, seizure prophylaxis (anti-epileptogenic), familial Mediterranean fever syndrome, gout, restless leg syndrome, arrhythmias, fibromyalgia, neuroprotection under ischaemic conditions caused by stroke or neural trauma, tachy-arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation and as a general or local anaesthetic.

As used herein, the term “pain” refers to all categories of pain and is recognized to include, but is not limited to, neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, nociceptive pain, idiopathic pain, neuralgic pain, orofacial pain, burn pain, burning mouth syndrome, somatic pain, visceral pain, myofacial pain, dental pain, cancer pain, chemotherapy pain, trauma pain, surgical pain, post-surgical pain, childbirth pain, labor pain, chronic regional pain syndrome (CRPS), reflex sympathetic dystrophy, brachial plexus avulsion, neurogenic bladder, acute pain (e.g., musculoskeletal and post-operative pain), chronic pain, persistent pain, peripherally mediated pain, centrally mediated pain, chronic headache, migraine headache, familial hemiplegic migraine, conditions associated with cephalic pain, sinus headache, tension headache, phantom limb pain, peripheral nerve injury, pain following stroke, thalamic lesions, radiculopathy, HIV pain, post-herpetic pain, non-cardiac chest pain, irritable bowel syndrome and pain associated with bowel disorders and dyspepsia, and combinations thereof.

Furthermore, sodium channel blockers have clinical uses in addition to pain. The present invention therefore also relates to compounds, pharmaceutical compositions and methods of using the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of diseases or conditions such as cancer and pruritus (itch).

Pruritus, commonly known as itch, is a common dermatological condition. While the exact causes of pruritus are complex and incompletely understood, there has long been evidence that itch involves sensory neurons, especially C fibers, similar to those that mediate pain (Schmelz, M., et al., J. Neurosci. (1997), 17: 8003-8). In particular, it is believed that sodium influx through voltage-gated sodium channels is essential for the propagation of itch sensation from the skin. Transmission of the itch impulses results in the unpleasant sensation that elicits the desire or reflex to scratch.

Multiple causes and electrical pathways for eliciting itch are known. In humans, pruritis can be elicited by histamine or PAR-2 agonists such as mucunain that activate distinct populations of C fibers (Namer, B., et al., J. Neurophysiol. (2008), 100: 2062-9). A variety of neurotrophic peptides are known to mediate itch in animal models (Wang, H., and Yosipovitch, G., International Journal of Dermatology (2010), 49: 1-11). Itch can also be elicited by opioids, evidence of distinct pharmacology from that of pain responses.

There exists a complex interaction between itch and pain responses that arises in part from the overlapping sensory input from the skin (Ikoma, A., et al., Arch. Dermatol. (2003), 139: 1475-8) and also from the diverse etiology of both pain and pruritis. Pain responses can exacerbate itching by enhancing central sensitization or lead to inhibition of painful scratching. Particularly severe forms of chronic itch occur when pain responses are absent, as in the case of post-herpetic itch (Oaklander, A. L., et al., Pain (2002), 96: 9-12).

The compounds of the invention can also be useful for treating pruritus. The rationale for treating itch with inhibitors of voltage-gated sodium channels, especially NaV1.7, is as follows:

1) The propagation of electrical activity in the C fibers that sense pruritinergic stimulants requires sodium entry through voltage-gated sodium channels. 2) NaV1.7 is expressed in the C fibers and keratinocytes in human skin (Zhao, P., et al., Pain (2008), 139: 90-105). 3) A gain of function mutation of NaV1.7 (L858F) that causes erythromelalgia also causes chronic itch (Li, Y., et al., Clinical and Experimental Dermatology (2009), 34: e313-e4). 4) Chronic itch can be alleviated with treatment by sodium channel blockers, such as the local anesthetic lidocaine (Oaklander, A. L., et al., Pain (2002), 96: 9-12; Villamil, A. G., et al., The American Journal of Medicine (2005), 118: 1160-3). In these reports, lidocaine was effective when administered either intravenously or topically (a Lidoderm patch). Lidocaine can have multiple activities at the plasma concentrations achieved when administered systemically, but when administered topically, the plasma concentrations are only about 1 μM (Center for Drug Evaluation and Research NDA 20-612). At these concentrations, lidocaine is selective for sodium channel block and inhibits spontaneous electrical activity in C fibers and pain responses in animal models (Xiao, W. H., and Bennett, G. J. Pain (2008), 137: 218-28). The types of itch or skin irritation, include, but are not limited to: a) psoriatic pruritus, itch due to hemodyalisis, aguagenic pruritus, and itching caused by skin disorders (e.g., contact dermatitis), systemic disorders, neuropathy, psychogenic factors or a mixture thereof; b) itch caused by allergic reactions, insect bites, hypersensitivity (e.g., dry skin, acne, eczema, psoriasis), inflammatory conditions or injury; c) itch associated with vulvar vestibulitis; and d) skin irritation or inflammatory effect from administration of another therapeutic such as, for example, antibiotics, antivirals and antihistamines.

The compounds of the invention are also useful in treating certain cancers, such as hormone sensitive cancers, such as prostate cancer (adenocarcinoma), breast cancer, ovarian cancer, testicular cancer and thyroid neoplasia, in a mammal, preferably a human. The voltage gated sodium channels have been demonstrated to be expressed in prostate and breast cancer cells. Up-regulation of neonatal NaV1.5 occurs as an integral part of the metastatic process in human breast cancer and could serve both as a novel marker of the metastatic phenotype and a therapeutic target (Clin. Cancer Res. (2005), August 1; 11(15): 5381-9). Functional expression of voltage-gated sodium channel alpha-subunits, specifically NaV1.7, is associated with strong metastatic potential in prostate cancer (CaP) in vitro. Voltage-gated sodium channel alpha-subunits immunostaining, using antibodies specific to the sodium channel alpha subunit was evident in prostatic tissues and markedly stronger in CaP vs non-CaP patients (Prostate Cancer Prostatic Dis., 2005; 8(3):266-73). See also Diss, J. K. J., et al., Mol. Cell. Neurosci. (2008), 37:537-547 and Kis-Toth, K., et al., The Journal of Immunology (2011), 187:1273-1280.

In consideration of the above, in one embodiment, the present invention provides a method for treating a mammal for, or protecting a mammal from developing, a sodium channel-mediated disease, especially pain, comprising administering to the mammal, especially a human, in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention wherein the compound modulates the activity of one or more voltage-dependent sodium channels.

In another embodiment of the invention is a method of treating a disease or a condition in a mammal, preferably a human, wherein the disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of pain, depression, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases, and psychiatric diseases, and combinations thereof, and wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an embodiment of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

One embodiment of this embodiment is wherein the disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, visceral pain, cancer pain, chemotherapy pain, trauma pain, surgical pain, post-surgical pain, childbirth pain, labor pain, neurogenic bladder, ulcerative colitis, chronic pain, persistent pain, peripherally mediated pain, centrally mediated pain, chronic headache, migraine headache, sinus headache, tension headache, phantom limb pain, peripheral nerve injury, and combinations thereof.

Another embodiment of this embodiment is wherein the disease or condition is selected from the group consisting of pain associated with HIV, HIV treatment induced neuropathy, trigeminal neuralgia, post herpetic neuralgia, eudynia, heat sensitivity, tosarcoidosis, irritable bowel syndrome, Crohns disease, pain associated with multiple sclerosis (MS), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), diabetic neuropathy, peripheral neuropathy, arthritic, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, atherosclerosis, paroxysmal dystonia, myasthenia syndromes, myotonia, malignant hyperthermia, cystic fibrosis, pseudoaldosteronism, rhabdomyolysis, hypothyroidism, bipolar depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, sodium channel toxin related illnesses, familial erythromelalgia, primary erythromelalgia, familial rectal pain, cancer, epilepsy, partial and general tonic seizures, restless leg syndrome, arrhythmias, fibromyalgia, neuroprotection under ischaemic conditions caused by stroke or neural trauma, tachy arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation.

Another embodiment of the invention is a method of treating, but not preventing, pain in a mammal, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

One embodiment of this embodiment is a method wherein the pain is selected from the group consisting of neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, visceral pain, cancer pain, chemotherapy pain, trauma pain, surgical pain, post-surgical pain, childbirth pain, labor pain, dental pain, chronic pain, persistent pain, peripherally mediated pain, centrally mediated pain, chronic headache, migraine headache, sinus headache, tension headache, phantom limb pain, peripheral nerve injury, trigeminal neuralgia, post herpetic neuralgia, eudynia, familial erythromelalgia, primary erythromelalgia, familial rectal pain or fibromyalgia, and combinations thereof.

Another embodiment of this embodiment is a method wherein the pain is associated with a disease or condition selected from HIV, HIV treatment induced neuropathy, heat sensitivity, tosarcoidosis, irritable bowel syndrome, Crohns disease, multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, diabetic neuropathy, peripheral neuropathy, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, atherosclerosis, paroxysmal dystonia, myasthenia syndromes, myotonia, malignant hyperthermia, cystic fibrosis, pseudoaldosteronism, rhabdomyolysis, hypothyroidism, bipolar depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, sodium channel toxin related illnesses, neurogenic bladder, ulcerative colitis, cancer, epilepsy, partial and general tonic seizures, restless leg syndrome, arrhythmias, ischaemic conditions caused by stroke or neural trauma, tachy arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation.

Another embodiment of the invention is the method of treating pain in a mammal, preferably a human, by the inhibition of ion flux through a voltage dependent sodium channel in the mammal, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an embodiment of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

Another embodiment of the invention is the method of treating pruritus in a mammal, preferably a human, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an embodiment of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

Another embodiment of the invention is the method of treating cancer in a mammal, preferably a human, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an embodiment of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

Another embodiment of the invention is the method of decreasing ion flux through a voltage dependent sodium channel in a cell in a mammal, wherein the method comprises contacting the cell with an embodiment of a compound of the invention, as set forth above, as a stereoisomer, enantiomer or tautomer thereof or mixtures thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof.

Another embodiment of the invention is the method of selectively inhibiting a first voltage-gated sodium channel over a second voltage-gated sodium channel in a mammal, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal an inhibitory amount of a compound of formula (I), or an embodiment of a compound of formula (I).

Another embodiment of the invention is the method of selectively inhibiting NaV1.7 in a mammal or a mammalian cell as compared to NaV1.5, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof an inhibitory amount of a compound of formula (I) or an embodiment of an embodiment thereof.

For each of the above embodiments described related to treating diseases and conditions in a mammal, the present invention also contemplates relatedly a compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof for the use as a medicament in the treatment of such diseases and conditions.

For each of the above embodiments described related to treating diseases and conditions in a mammal, the present invention also contemplates relatedly the use of a compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of such diseases and conditions.

Another embodiment of the invention is a method of using the compounds of formula (I) as standards or controls in in vitro or in vivo assays in determining the efficacy of test compounds in modulating voltage-dependent sodium channels.

In another embodiment of the invention, the compounds of formula (I) are isotopically-labeled by having one or more atoms therein replaced by an atom having a different atomic mass or mass number. Such isotopically-labeled (i.e., radiolabelled) compounds of formula (I) are considered to be within the scope of this invention. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into the compounds of formula (I) include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine, and iodine, such as, but not limited to, ²H, ³H, ¹¹C, ¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹³N, ¹⁵N, ¹⁵O, ¹⁷O, ¹⁸O, ³¹P, ³²P, ³⁵S, ³⁵F, ³⁶Cl, ¹²³I, and ¹²⁵I, respectively. These isotopically-labeled compounds would be useful to help determine or measure the effectiveness of the compounds, by characterizing, for example, the site or mode of action on the sodium channels, or binding affinity to pharmacologically important site of action on the sodium channels, particularly NaV1.7. Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of formula (I), for example, those incorporating a radioactive isotope, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e. ³H, and carbon-14, i.e., ¹⁴C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.

Substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e. ²H, may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements, and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.

Substitution with positron emitting isotopes, such as ¹¹C, ¹⁸F, ¹⁵O and ¹³N, can be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy. Isotopically-labeled compounds of formula (I) can generally be prepared by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art or by processes analogous to those described in the Examples as set out below using an appropriate isotopically-labeled reagent in place of the non-labeled reagent previously employed.

Testing Compounds

The assessment of the compounds of the invention in mediating, especially inhibiting, the sodium channel ion flux can be determined using the assays described hereinbelow. Alternatively, the assessment of the compounds in treating conditions and diseases in humans may be established in industry standard animal models for demonstrating the efficacy of compounds in treating pain. Animal models of human neuropathic pain conditions have been developed that result in reproducible sensory deficits (allodynia, hyperalgesia, and spontaneous pain) over a sustained period of time that can be evaluated by sensory testing. By establishing the degree of mechanical, chemical, and temperature induced allodynia and hyperalgesia present, several physiopathological conditions observed in humans can be modeled allowing the evaluation of pharmacotherapies.

In rat models of peripheral nerve injury, ectopic activity in the injured nerve corresponds to the behavioral signs of pain. In these models, intravenous application of the sodium channel blocker and local anesthetic lidocaine can suppress the ectopic activity and reverse the tactile allodynia at concentrations that do not affect general behavior and motor function (Mao, J. and Chen, L. L, Pain (2000), 87:7-17). Allometric scaling of the doses effective in these rat models, translates into doses similar to those shown to be efficacious in humans (Tanelian, D. L. and Brose, W. G., Anesthesiology (1991), 74(5):949-951). Furthermore, Lidoderm®, lidocaine applied in the form of a dermal patch, is currently an FDA approved treatment for post-herpetic neuralgia (Devers, A. and Glaler, B. S., Clin. J. Pain (2000), 16(3):205-8).

The present invention readily affords many different means for identification of sodium channel modulating agents that are useful as therapeutic agents. Identification of modulators of sodium channel can be assessed using a variety of in vitro and in vivo assays, e.g., measuring current, measuring membrane potential, measuring ion flux, (e.g., sodium or guanidinium), measuring sodium concentration, measuring second messengers and transcription levels, and using e.g., voltage-sensitive dyes, radioactive tracers, and patch-clamp electrophysiology.

One such protocol involves the screening of chemical agents for ability to modulate the activity of a sodium channel thereby identifying it as a modulating agent.

A typical assay described in Bean et al., J. General Physiology (1983), 83:613-642, and Leuwer, M., et al., Br. J. Pharmacol (2004), 141(1):47-54, uses patch-clamp techniques to study the behavior of channels. Such techniques are known to those skilled in the art, and may be developed, using current technologies, into low or medium throughput assays for evaluating compounds for their ability to modulate sodium channel behavior.

Throughput of test compounds is an important consideration in the choice of screening assay to be used. In some strategies, where hundreds of thousands of compounds are to be tested, it is not desirable to use low throughput means. In other cases, however, low throughput is satisfactory to identify important differences between a limited number of compounds. Often it will be necessary to combine assay types to identify specific sodium channel modulating compounds.

Electrophysiological assays using patch clamp techniques is accepted as a gold standard for detailed characterization of sodium channel compound interactions, and as described in Bean et al., op. cit. and Leuwer, M., et al., op. cit. There is a manual low-throughput screening (LTS) method which can compare 2-10 compounds per day; a recently developed system for automated medium-throughput screening (MTS) at 20-50 patches (i.e. compounds) per day; and a technology from Molecular Devices Corporation (Sunnyvale, Calif.) which permits automated high-throughput screening (HTS) at 1000-3000 patches (i.e. compounds) per day.

One automated patch-clamp system utilizes planar electrode technology to accelerate the rate of drug discovery. Planar electrodes are capable of achieving high-resistance, cells-attached seals followed by stable, low-noise whole-cell recordings that are comparable to conventional recordings. A suitable instrument is the PatchXpress 7000A (Axon Instruments Inc., Union City, Calif.). A variety of cell lines and culture techniques, which include adherent cells as well as cells growing spontaneously in suspension are ranked for seal success rate and stability. Immortalized cells (e.g. HEK and CHO) stably expressing high levels of the relevant sodium ion channel can be adapted into high-density suspension cultures.

Other assays can be selected which allow the investigator to identify compounds which block specific states of the channel, such as the open state, closed state or the resting state, or which block transition from open to closed, closed to resting or resting to open. Those skilled in the art are generally familiar with such assays.

Binding assays are also available. Designs include traditional radioactive filter based binding assays or the confocal based fluorescent system available from Evotec OAI group of companies (Hamburg, Germany), both of which are HTS.

Radioactive flux assays can also be used. In this assay, channels are stimulated to open with veratridine or aconitine and held in a stabilized open state with a toxin, and channel blockers are identified by their ability to prevent ion influx. The assay can use radioactive 22[Na] and 14[C] guanidinium ions as tracers. FlashPlate & Cytostar-T plates in living cells avoids separation steps and are suitable for HTS. Scintillation plate technology has also advanced this method to HTS suitability. Because of the functional aspects of the assay, the information content is reasonably good.

Yet another format measures the redistribution of membrane potential using the FLIPR system membrane potential kit (HTS) available from Molecular Dynamics (a division of Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, N.J.). This method is limited to slow membrane potential changes. Some problems may result from the fluorescent background of compounds. Test compounds may also directly influence the fluidity of the cell membrane and lead to an increase in intracellular dye concentrations. Still, because of the functional aspects of the assay, the information content is reasonably good.

Sodium dyes can be used to measure the rate or amount of sodium ion influx through a channel. This type of assay provides a very high information content regarding potential channel blockers. The assay is functional and would measure Na+ influx directly. CoroNa Red, SBFI and/or sodium green (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene Oreg.) can be used to measure Na influx; all are Na responsive dyes. They can be used in combination with the FLIPR instrument. The use of these dyes in a screen has not been previously described in the literature. Calcium dyes may also have potential in this format.

In another assay, FRET based voltage sensors are used to measure the ability of a test compound to directly block Na influx. Commercially available HTS systems include the VIPR™ II FRET system (Life Technologies, or Aurora Biosciences Corporation, San Diego, Calif., a division of Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc.) which may be used in conjunction with FRET dyes, also available from Aurora Biosciences. This assay measures sub-second responses to voltage changes. There is no requirement for a modifier of channel function. The assay measures depolarization and hyperpolarizations, and provides ratiometric outputs for quantification. A somewhat less expensive MTS version of this assay employs the FLEXstation™ (Molecular Devices Corporation) in conjunction with FRET dyes from Aurora Biosciences. Other methods of testing the compounds disclosed herein are also readily known and available to those skilled in the art.

Modulating agents so identified are then tested in a variety of in vivo models so as to determine if they alleviate pain, especially chronic pain or other conditions such as cancer and pruritus (itch) with minimal adverse events. The assays described below in the Biological Assays Section are useful in assessing the biological activity of the instant compounds.

Typically, the efficacy of a compound of the invention is expressed by its IC50 value (“Inhibitory Concentration—50%”), which is the measure of the amount of compound required to achieve 50% inhibition of the activity of the target sodium channel over a specific time period. For example, representative compounds of the present invention have demonstrated IC50's ranging from less than 100 nanomolar to less than 10 micromolar in the patch voltage clamp NaV1.7 electrophysiology assay described herein.

In another aspect of the invention, the compounds of the invention can be used in in vitro or in vivo studies as exemplary agents for comparative purposes to find other compounds also useful in treatment of, or protection from, the various diseases disclosed herein.

Another aspect of the invention relates to inhibiting NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, or NaV1.9 activity, preferably NaV1.7 activity, in a biological sample or a mammal, preferably a human, which method comprises administering to the mammal, preferably a human, or contacting said biological sample with a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (I). The term “biological sample”, as used herein, includes, without limitation, cell cultures or extracts thereof; biopsied material obtained from a mammal or extracts thereof; and blood, saliva, urine, feces, semen, tears, or other body fluids or extracts thereof.

Inhibition of NaV1.1, NaV1.2, NaV1.3, NaV1.4, NaV1.5, NaV1.6, NaV1.7, NaV1.8, or NaV1.9 activity in a biological sample is useful for a variety of purposes that are known to one of skill in the art. Examples of such purposes include, but are not limited to, the study of sodium ion channels in biological and pathological phenomena; and the comparative evaluation of new sodium ion channel inhibitors.

The compounds of the invention (or stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, or prodrugs thereof) and/or the pharmaceutical compositions described herein which comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and one or more compounds of the invention, can be used in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of sodium channel-mediated disease or condition in a mammal.

D. Combination Therapy

The compounds of the invention may be usefully combined with one or more other compounds of the invention or one or more other therapeutic agent or as any combination thereof, in the treatment of sodium channel-mediated diseases and conditions. For example, a compound of the invention may be administered simultaneously, sequentially or separately in combination with other therapeutic agents, including, but not limited to:

opiates analgesics, e.g., morphine, heroin, cocaine, oxymorphine, levorphanol, levallorphan, oxycodone, codeine, dihydrocodeine, propoxyphene, nalmefene, fentanyl, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, meripidine, methadone, nalorphine, naloxone, naltrexone, buprenorphine, butorphanol, nalbuphine and pentazocine;

non-opiate analgesics, e.g., acetaminophen, salicylates (e.g., aspirin);

nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), e.g., ibuprofen, naproxen, fenoprofen, ketoprofen, celecoxib, diclofenac, diflusinal, etodolac, fenbufen, fenoprofen, flufenisal, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, indomethacin, ketoprofen, ketorolac, meclofenamic acid, mefenamic acid, meloxicam, nabumetone, naproxen, nimesulide, nitroflurbiprofen, olsalazine, oxaprozin, phenylbutazone, piroxicam, sulfasalazine, sulindac, tolmetin and zomepirac;

anticonvulsants, e.g., carbamazepine, oxcarbazepine, lamotrigine, valproate, topiramate, gabapentin and pregabalin;

antidepressants such as tricyclic antidepressants, e.g., amitriptyline, clomipramine, despramine, imipramine and nortriptyline;

COX-2 selective inhibitors, e.g., celecoxib, rofecoxib, parecoxib, valdecoxib, deracoxib, etoricoxib, and lumiracoxib;

alpha-adrenergics, e.g., doxazosin, tamsulosin, clonidine, guanfacine, dexmetatomidine, modafinil, and 4-amino-6,7-dimethoxy-2-(5-methane sulfonamido-1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinol-2-yl)-5-(2-pyridyl) quinazoline;

barbiturate sedatives, e.g., amobarbital, aprobarbital, butabarbital, butabital, mephobarbital, metharbital, methohexital, pentobarbital, phenobartital, secobarbital, talbutal, theamylal and thiopental;

tachykinin (NK) antagonist, particularly an NK-3, NK-2 or NK-1 antagonist, e.g., (aR, 9R)-7-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl)]-8,9,10,11-tetrahydro-9-methyl-5-(4-methylphenyl)-7H-[1,4]diaz ocino[2,1-g][1,7]-naphthyridine-6-13-dione (TAK-637), 5-[[2R,3S)-2-[(1R)-1-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethylphenyl]ethoxy-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-morpholinyl]-methyl]-1,2-dihydro-3H-1,2,4-triazol-3-one (MK-869), aprepitant, lanepitant, dapitant or 3-[[2-methoxy5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]-methylamino]-2-phenylpiperidine (2S,3S);

coal-tar analgesics, in particular paracetamol;

serotonin reuptake inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, sertraline, norfluoxetine (fluoxetine desmethyl metabolite), metabolite demethylsertraline, ′3 fluvoxamine, paroxetine, citalopram, citalopram metabolite desmethylcitalopram, escitalopram, d,l-fenfluramine, femoxetine, ifoxetine, cyanodothiepin, litoxetine, dapoxetine, nefazodone, cericlamine, trazodone and fluoxetine;

noradrenaline (norepinephrine) reuptake inhibitors, e.g., maprotiline, lofepramine, mirtazepine, oxaprotiline, fezolamine, tomoxetine, mianserin, buproprion, buproprion metabolite hydroxybuproprion, nomifensine and viloxazine (Vivalan®)), especially a selective noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor such as reboxetine, in particular (S,S)-reboxetine, and venlafaxine duloxetine neuroleptics sedative/anxiolytics;

dual serotonin-noradrenaline reuptake inhibitors, such as venlafaxine, venlafaxine metabolite O-desmethylvenlafaxine, clomipramine, clomipramine metabolite desmethylclomipramine, duloxetine, milnacipran and imipramine;

acetylcholinesterase inhibitors such as donepezil;

5-HT3 antagonists such as ondansetron;

metabotropic glutamate receptor (mGluR) antagonists;

local anaesthetic such as mexiletine and lidocaine;

corticosteroid such as dexamethasone;

antiarrhythmics, e.g., mexiletine and phenytoin;

muscarinic antagonists, e.g., tolterodine, propiverine, tropsium t chloride, darifenacin, solifenacin, temiverine and ipratropium;

cannabinoids;

vanilloid receptor agonists (e.g., resinferatoxin) or antagonists (e.g., capsazepine);

sedatives, e.g., glutethimide, meprobamate, methaqualone, and dichloralphenazone;

anxiolytics such as benzodiazepines,

antidepressants such as mirtazapine,

topical agents (e.g., lidocaine, capsaicin and resiniferotoxin);

muscle relaxants such as benzodiazepines, baclofen, carisoprodol, chlorzoxazone, cyclobenzaprine, methocarbamol and orphrenadine;

anti-histamines or H1 antagonists;

NMDA receptor antagonists;

5-HT receptor agonists/antagonists;

PDEV inhibitors;

Tramadol®;

cholinergic (nicotinic) analgesics;

alpha-2-delta ligands;

prostaglandin E2 subtype antagonists;

leukotriene B4 antagonists;

5-lipoxygenase inhibitors; and

5-HT3 antagonists.

Sodium channel-mediated diseases and conditions that may be treated and/or prevented using such combinations include but not limited to, pain, central and peripherally mediated, acute, chronic, neuropathic as well as other diseases with associated pain and other central nervous disorders such as epilepsy, anxiety, depression and bipolar disease; or cardiovascular disorders such as arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation; neuromuscular disorders such as restless leg syndrome and muscle paralysis or tetanus; neuroprotection against stroke, neural trauma and multiple sclerosis; and channelopathies such as erythromyalgia and familial rectal pain syndrome.

As used herein “combination” refers to any mixture or permutation of one or more compounds of the invention and one or more other compounds of the invention or one or more additional therapeutic agent. Unless the context makes clear otherwise, “combination” may include simultaneous or sequentially delivery of a compound of the invention with one or more therapeutic agents. Unless the context makes clear otherwise, “combination” may include dosage forms of a compound of the invention with another therapeutic agent. Unless the context makes clear otherwise, “combination” may include routes of administration of a compound of the invention with another therapeutic agent. Unless the context makes clear otherwise, “combination” may include formulations of a compound of the invention with another therapeutic agent. Dosage forms, routes of administration and pharmaceutical compositions include, but are not limited to, those described herein.

The invention will be more fully understood by reference to the following examples. They should not, however, be construed as limiting the scope of the invention.

D. Examples

These examples serve to provide guidance to a skilled artisan to prepare and use the compounds, compositions and methods of the invention. While particular embodiments of the present invention are described, the skilled artisan will appreciate that various changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the inventions.

The chemical reactions in the examples (preparations) described can be readily adapted to prepare a number of other compounds of the invention, and alternative methods for preparing the compounds of this invention are deemed to be within the scope of this invention. For example, the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds according to the invention can be successfully performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, for example, by appropriately protecting interfering group, by utilizing other suitable reagents known in the art, for example, by appropriately protecting interfering groups by utilizing other suitable reagents known in the art other than those described, and/or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions.

In the examples below, unless otherwise indicated all temperatures are set forth in degrees Celsius. Commercially viable reagents were purchased from suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Company, Lancaster, TCI or Maybridge and were used without further purification unless otherwise indicated. The reactions set forth below were done generally under a positive pressure of nitrogen or argon or with a drying tube (unless otherwise stated) in anhydrous solvents, and the reaction flasks were typically fitted with rubber septa for the introduction of substrates and reagents via syringe. Glassware was oven dried and/or heat dried. ¹H NMR spectra were obtained in deuterated CDCl₃, d₆-DMSO, CH₃OD or d₆-acetone solvent solutions (reported in ppm) using or trimethylsilane (TMS) or residual non-deuterated solvent peaks as the reference standard. When peak multiplicities are reported, the following abbreviates are used: s (singlet), d (doublet), t (triplet), q (quartet), m (multiplet, br (broadened), dd (doublet of doublets), dt (doublet of triplets). Coupling constants (J), when given, are reported in Hz (Hertz).

All abbreviations used to describe reagents, reaction conditions or equipment are intended to be consistent with the definitions set forth in the “List of standard abbreviates and acronyms”. The chemical names of discrete compounds of the invention were obtained using the structure naming feature of ChemDraw naming program.

HPLC method A: XBridge C18, 30×50 mm, 5 um; mobile phase: A water (0.1% TFA), B CH₃CN (0.1% TFA); gradient: 15%-95% B over 8.25 min then 95% B for 1 min; flow rate: 60 mL/min.

HPLC method B: XBridge C18, 30×50 mm, 5 um; mobile phase: A water (0.1% TFA), B CH₃CN (0.1% TFA); gradient: 10%-95% B over 7.25 min then 95% B for 1 min; flow rate: 60 mL/min.

HPLC method C: XBridge C18, 30×50 mm, 5 um; mobile phase: A water (0.1% TFA), B CH₃CN (0.1% TFA); gradient: 15%-75% B over 8.25 min then 95% B for 1 min; flow rate: 60 mL/min.

Abbreviations used herein are as follows:

EtOAc Ethyl acetate DBU 1,8-Diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene

DCE Dichloroethane DCM Dichloromethane DIPEA Diisopropylethylamine

DME Ethyleneglycol dimethyl ether

DMF N,N-Dimethylformamide DMSO Dimethylsulfoxide

HCl Hydrochloric acid

HPLC High Pressure Liquid Chromatography

IMS Industrial methylated spirits

LCMS Liquid Chromatography Mass Spectrometry MeOH Methanol

RPHPLC Reverse phase high pressure liquid chromatography RT Retention time

THF Tetrahydrofuran

TFA Trifluoroacetic acid

Preparation 1 Synthesis of Ethyl 4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)benzoate

A mixture of 3,4-dichlorophenol (3.08 g, 18.9 mmol), ethyl 4-(bromomethyl)benzoate (4.59 g, 18.9 mmol) and potassium carbonate (5.22 g, 37.8 mmol) in anhydrous dimethyl formamide (50 mL) was heated to 60° C. under nitrogen. After 1.5 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL), washed with water (50 mL), saturated ammonium chloride (2×50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (4.04 g, 66%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.05 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.44 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.30 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 6.79 (dd, J=8.8, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 5.06 (s, 2H), 4.36 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 1.38 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H); MS (ES+) m/z: 324.8, 326.7 (M+1).

Preparation 2 Synthesis of 4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)benzoic Acid

A mixture of ethyl 4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)benzoate (Preparation 1, 1.26 g, 3.87 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (0.62 g, 15.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) and water (20 mL) was heated to reflux for 18 h. The organic solvent was removed in vacuo and the aqueous solution was cooled to 0° C. The aqueous solution was acidified slowly with concentrated hydrochloric acid to pH˜2. The solid was filtered and rinsed with water to afford the title compound as a white solid (1.15 g, quant. yield); ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.00 (br s, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.54-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.32-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.03-6.97 (m, 1H), 5.19 (s, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z: 294.8, 296.8 (M−1).

Preparation 3 Synthesis of 5-chloro-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2,4-difluorobenzamide

To a mixture of 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoic acid (9.69 g, 50.3 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (16.1 g, 99.3 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated at reflux for 0.5 h and then cooled to ambient temperature. N,N-Dimethylsulfamide (12.3 g, 99.1 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (22.4 mL, 145 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 d. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (500 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×400 mL), brine (2×400 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford a mixture of the title compound and 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoic acid. Anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) and 1,1′-carbonyldiimizadole (6.49 g, 40.0 mmol) was added to this mixture followed by heating at reflux for 45 minutes and then cooling to ambient temperature. N,N-Dimethylsulfamide (5.02 g, 40.4 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (7.9 mL, 52 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 22 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (500 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×400 mL), brine (2×400 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a white solid (10.4 g, 69%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.69 (d, J=12.9 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (dd, J=8.2, 11.1 Hz, 1H), 3.01 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 297.1, 299.1 (M−1).

Preparation 4 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)-phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

To a mixture of tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)-phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate (Preparation 5, 1.98 g, 4.49 mmol) in dichloromethane (30 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (4 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 h and then the solvent was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a white powder (1.64 g, 95%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.72 (br, 1H), 8.15 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.39-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.20 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (dd, J=2.8, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.68 (d, J=10.9 Hz, 1H); MS (ES−) m/z 383.0, 385.0 (M−1).

Preparation 5 Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)-phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate

To a mixture of tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate (WO2012007883A1, 1.17 g, 4.72 mmol) and 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol (1.02 g, 4.80 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) was added potassium carbonate (1.31 g, 9.45 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 19 h. The reaction mixture was then diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL), washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2×200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to dryness to afford the title compound as a white solid (2.02 g, 97%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.98 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.31 (m, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 6.93 (dd, J=2.9, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.68 (d, J=10.8 Hz, 1H), 1.57 (s, 9H); MS (ES+) m/z 440.9, 441.9 (M+1).

Preparation 6 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)-pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

To a mixture of methyl 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)-pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate (Preparation 7, 0.97 g, 2.11 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (30 mL) and water (15 mL) was added lithium hydroxide (0.300 g, 12.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 1 h. After cooling to ambient temperature, the mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with IN hydrochloric acid (2×150 mL), brine (200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.91 g, 97%): H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.63 (s, 1H), 7.99-7.86 (m, 3H), 7.59 (d, J=11.0 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (tt, J=4.5, 51.9 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 4.85 (t, J=14.0 Hz, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 444.0, 446.0 (M−1).

Preparation 7 Synthesis of Methyl 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)-pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

To a cold (0° C.) mixture of methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate (Preparation 8, 0.800 g, 3.66 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) was added methanesulfonyl chloride (0.37 mL, 4.8 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.96 mL, 5.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and stirred for 17 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (200 mL), brine (200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and dimethyl sulfoxide (25 mL) was added. To this mixture was added 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol (WO2012007869A2, 1.47 g, 5.66 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.01 g, 7.30 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 h and was then diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2×200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified via silica gel column chromatography using 0-10% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.98 g, 58% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.97 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (d, J=10.8 Hz, 1H), 6.06 (tt, J=5.0 Hz, 53.1 Hz, 1H), 5.12 (s, 2H), 4.70 (t, J=12.2 Hz, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H); MS (ES+) 459.9, 461.9 (M+1).

Preparation 8 Synthesis of Methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate

To a mixture of methyl 4-(((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)methyl)-5-chloro-2-fluorobenzoate (Preparation 9, 2.18 g, 6.55 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (75 mL) was added 3 N hydrochloric acid (4 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3.5 h and was then diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with 1 N hydrochloric acid (2×200 mL), brine (200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified via silica gel column chromatography using 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.80 g, 56% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.89 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.78 (s, 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 2.04 (br s, 1H); MS (ES+) 219.1, 221.1 (M+1).

Preparation 9 Synthesis of Methyl 4-((tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy)methyl)-5-chloro-2-fluorobenzoate

A mixture of (4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyloxy)(tert-butyl)dimethylsilane (Preparation 10, 4.56 g, 12.9 mmol), palladium (II) acetate (0.88 g, 1.29 mmol), XANTPHOS (0.75 g, 1.29 mmol), triethylamine (2.62 g, 25.9 mmol) and methanol (8.30 g, 25.9 mmol) in dioxane (100 mL) was flushed with carbon monoxide for 10 min. The reaction mixture was then refluxed under carbon monoxide (1 atm) for 16 h. The solid was filtered through a pad of Celite and the filtrate was diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL), washed with saturated ammonium chloride (3×20 mL), brine (3×20 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate in hexanes using 0-10% gradient to afford the title compound as a viscous liquid (0.71 g, 34% yield, based on 2.27 g recovered 4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyloxy)(tert-butyl)dimethylsilane): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.85 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 0.94 (s, 9H), 0.12 (s, 6H).

Preparation 10 Synthesis of (4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyloxy) (tert-butyl)dimethylsilane

A mixture of (4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorophenyl)methanol (PREPARATION 17, 10.0 g, 44.7 mmol), tert-butyldimethylsilane chloride (10.1 g, 67.1 mmol) and imidazole (9.10 g, 134 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (50 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 6 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (600 mL), washed with brine (3×250 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate in hexanes using 0-10% gradient to afford the title compound as a viscous liquid (14.1 g, 89% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.90 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 0.91 (s, 9H), 0.12 (s, 6H).

Preparation 11 Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-isobutoxypyridine

A solution of 2-methylpropan-1-ol (7.92 g, 107 mmol) was added to a slurry of sodium hydride (3.21 g, 134 mmol, 60% dispersion in oil) in N,N-dimethylformamide (50 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 0.5 h, followed by the addition of a solution of 5-bromo-2,3-dichloropyridine (20.2 g, 89.0 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (80 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and then quenched with brine (100 mL). The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified via silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate in hexanes using 10-30% gradient to afford the title compound as a colourless liquid (22.9 g, 81% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.04 (s, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 2H), 2.17-1.97 (m 1H), 1.00 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 6H).

Preparation 12 Synthesis of 3-chloro-2-isobutoxy-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine

A mixture of 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-isobutoxypyridine (Preparation 11, 10.6 g, 40.0 mmol), borane pinacol ester (12.7 g, 50.0 mmol), dichlorobistriphenylphosphine palladium (II) (2.80 g, 4.00 mmol) and potassium acetate (11.8 g, 120 mmol) in dioxane was refluxed for 4 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient temperature and then diluted with ethyl acetate (300 mL), washed with brine (3×100 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified via silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate in hexanes using 10-30% gradient to afford the title compound as a colourless liquid which was used in the next step without further characterization (11.9 g, 95% yield): MS (ES+) 312.2, 314.2 (M+1).

Preparation 13 Synthesis of 5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-ol

A mixture of 3-chloro-2-isobutoxy-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine (Preparation 12, 11.9 g, 38.3 mmol) and 35% hydrogen peroxide (4.90 g, 4.3 mL. 153 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 h. The reaction was diluted with acetate (200 mL), washed with saturated ammonium chloride (3×100 mL), brine (3×50 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a colourless liquid which was used in the next step (PREPARATION 18) without any further purification (7.69 g, quant. yield): MS (ES−) 200.2, 202.2 (M−1).

Preparation 14 Synthesis of 2,3-dichloro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 12 and making variations as required to replace 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-isobutoxypyridine with 5-bromo-2,3-dichloropyridine, the title compound was obtained as a yellow gum (5.46 g, quant. yield) and was used in the next step (PREPARATION 15) without any further characterization: MS (ES+) 274.0, 276.0, (M+1), 190.1, 192.1 (M−80).

Preparation 15 Synthesis of 5,6-dichloropyridin-3-ol

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 13 and making variations as required to replace 3-chloro-2-isobutoxy-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine with 2,3-dichloro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine (preparation 14), the title compound was obtained as a yellow gum (3.28 g, quant. yield) and was used in the next step without any further characterization: MS (ES+) 164.03, 166.03 (M+1).

Preparation 16 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 4, making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-((5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoate (PREPARATION 21), the title compound was obtained as a white solid (quant.): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.18-8.14 (m, 2H), 7.50 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.75 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H); MS (ES−) 333.9, 335.9 (M−1).

Preparation 17 Synthesis of (4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorophenyl)methanol

To a solution of methyl 4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzoate (15.4 g, 57.6 mmol) and methanol (3.70 g, 5.1 mL, 115.0 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran was added a solution of lithium borohydride in tetrahydrofuran (28.8 mL, 115.0 mmol, 1.0 M solution in tetrahydrofuran) at ambient temperature. The reaction solution was refluxed for 6 h then cooled to ambient temperature. To the reaction mixture was added methanol (50 mL), followed by dilution with ethyl acetate (500 mL). The reaction mixture was washed with 10% aqueous solution of HCl (3×100 mL), brine (3×100 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was triturated with ether to afford the title compound (12.9 g, quant. yield) as a colourless solid: ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.51 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (d, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 4.69 (s, 2H), 2.14 (br, 1H); MS (ES−) 239.0, 237.1 (M−1).

Preparation 18 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

To a mixture of 5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-ol (Preparation 13, 0.32 g, 1.56 mmol) and tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate (Preparation WO2012007883A, 10.39 g, 1.56 mmol) in anhydrous dimethyl sulfoxide (5 mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.431 g, 3.12 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL) and water (10 mL) was added. The organic phase was washed with water (10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound as pale yellow solid (0.51 g, 76%). The compound was used without further purification in the next step. To a mixture of tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoate (0.51 g, 1.19 mmol) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (4 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. After concentration in vacuo, the residue was triturated in diethyl ether/hexanes (1:1, 5 mL) to give the title compound as an off-white solid (0.38 g, 84% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 10.04 (br s, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.54 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.19-2.07 (m, 1H), 1.04 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 372.1, 374.1 (M−1).

Preparation 19 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)-pyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

To a mixture of tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)-pyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoate (Preparation 20, 3.30 g, 6.79 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 h. The reaction was washed with saturated solution of ammonium chloride (3×25 mL), brine (3×25 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (1.93 g, 66% yield) as colourless solid: MS (ES+) m/z 431.9, 433.9 (M+1).

Preparation 20 Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)-pyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoate

A mixture of 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol (PREPARATION WO 2012007869A2, 2.59 g, 10.0 mmol), tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate (PREPARATION WO2012007883A1, 2.48 g, 10.0 mmol) and potassium carbonate (2.07 g, 15.0 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 h followed by filtration. The residue was washed with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The filtrate was washed with saturated solution of ammonium chloride (3×20 mL), brine (3×20 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified via silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate in hexanes using 10-30% gradient to afford the title compound (3.30 g, 70% yield) as a pale yellow gum: MS (ES+) m/z 487.9, 489.9 (M+1).

Preparation 21 Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-(5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoate

A mixture of 5,6-dichloropyridin-3-ol (PREPARATION 15, 3.28 g, 20.0 mmol), tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate (PREPARATION WO 2012007883, 4.96 g, 20.0 mmol) and potassium carbonate (4.15 g, 30.0 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (30 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 6 h followed by filtration. The residue was washed with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The filtrate was washed with saturated solution of ammonium chloride (3×20 mL), brine (3×20 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified via silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate in hexanes using 10-30% gradient to afford the title compound (0.51 g, 7% yield) as a colourless solid: ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.09 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 6.74 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 1.58 (s, 9H).

Preparation 22 Synthesis of 1-bromo-5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)-methyl)-2-fluorobenzene

A mixture of 4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl methanesulfinate (PREPARATION 23, 3.17 g, 10.0 mmol), 3,4-dichlorophenol (1.79 g, 11.0 mmol) and potassium carbonate (2.03 g, 15.0 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 h followed by filtration. The residue was washed with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The filtrate was washed with water, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (2.50 g, 65% yield) as a colourless solid: MS (ES+) m/z 384.8, 386.7 (M+1).

Preparation 23 Synthesis of 4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl Methanesulfinate

To a solution of (4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorophenyl)methanol (PREPARATION 17, 6.50 g, 29.1 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran was added triethylamine (4.41 g, 6.1 mL, 43.7 mmol) followed by methanesulfonyl chloride (4.14 g, 36.1 mmol) at ambient temperature. The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 h then diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with 1N aqueous HCL (3×50 mL), brine (3×100 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (7.1 g, 77% yield) as a viscous liquid which turned to solid upon standing: ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.94 (dd, J=6.3, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 3.28 (s, 3H).

Preparation 24 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

To a mixture of 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (WO2012007883A1, 0.74 g, 2.00 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (0.65 g, 4.00 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 0.5 h and then cooled to ambient temperature. N,N-dimethylsulfamide (0.50 g, 4.00 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (0.9 mL, 6.0 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 2 h. After cooling to ambient temperature, the mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (80 mL), washed with hydrochloride acid (1N, 3×10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue which was triturated in diethyl ether (15 mL) to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.70 g, 74% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.00 (s, 1H), 7.96 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (dd, J=8.8, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (d, J=10.8 Hz, 1H), 2.89 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 473.0, 475.0 (M−1).

Preparation 25 Synthesis of 4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)benzoic acid (Preparation 2), the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.20 g, 50%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.84 (s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.56 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (dd, J=8.9, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 2.89 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 401.1, 403.1 (M−1).

Preparation 26 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

To a mixture of 1-bromo-5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzene (PREPARATION 22, 0.23 g, 0.60 mmol) in anhydrous dioxane (2 mL) was added palladium(II) acetate (13 mg, 0.06 mmol), xantphos (69 mg, 0.12 mmol), N,N-dimethylsulfamide (0.22 g, 1.80 mmol), and triethylamine (0.33 mL, 2.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux under an atmosphere of carbon monoxide for 24 h. After cooling to ambient temperature, the reaction mixture was quenched with hydrochloride acid (1N, 10 mL) and diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL). The organic phase was washed with hydrochloride acid (1N, 10 mL), water (10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford a residue which was purified by silica gel column chromatography using 0-40% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.068 g, 25% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.08 (br s, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.66-7.54 (m, 2H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 5.24 (s, 2H), 2.89 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 453.0, 455.0 (M−1).

Preparation 27 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

To a mixture of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (PREPARATION 18, 0.19 g, 0.50 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (0.162 g, 1.0 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 0.5 h and then cooled to an ambient temperature. N,N-Dimethylsulfamide (124 mg, 1.0 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (0.21 mL, 1.5 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloride acid (2×10 mL), water (10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue that was triturated in diethyl ether/hexanes (1:1, 10 mL) to afford the title compound as an off-white solid (0.18 g, 73% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.93 (s, 1H), 8.09-8.07 (m, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 2.88 (s, 6H), 2.13-2.00 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 478.1, 480.1 (M−1).

Preparation 28 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with sulfamide and trituration in methanol, the title compound was obtained as an off-white solid (0.15 g, 65%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.90 (s, 1H), 8.09-8.07 (m, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (s, 2H), 7.06 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.14-2.00 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 450.0, 452.0 (M−1).

Preparation 29 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with (methylsulfamoyl)amine and purification by silica gel column chromatography using 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.172 g, 23%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.84 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H) 8.08 (d, =2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.79-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 2.56 (d, J=4.1 Hz, 3H), 2.14-2.01 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 464.1, 466.1 (M−1).

Preparation 30 Synthesis of N—(N-benzylsulfamoyl)-5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with N-benzylsulfamide and purification by silica gel column chromatography using 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.14 g, 66%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.91 (br s, 1H), 8.69-8.54 (m, 1H), 8.10-8.05 (m, 1H), 8.01-7.96 (m, 1H), 7.53-7.45 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.19 (m, 5H), 7.04 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.20 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 2H), 4.12 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.13-1.99 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 542.1, 544.1 (M+1).

Preparation 31 Synthesis of N—(N-benzyl-N-methylsulfamoyl)-5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with amino-N-benzyl-N-methylsulfonamide and purification by silica gel column chromatography using 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.14 g, 62%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.17 (br s, 1H), 8.09 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.02-7.97 (m, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.44-7.28 (m, 5H), 7.10 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.45 (s, 2H), 4.13 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.80 (s, 3H), 2.14-2.01 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 556.1, 558.1 (M+1).

Preparation 32 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-(pyridin-2-ylmethyl)sulfamoyl)benzamide 2,2,2-trifluoroacetate

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with N-(pyridin-2-ylmethyl)sulfamide and purification by HPLC using Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.10 g, 37%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.72 (s, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=4.7 Hz, 1H), 8.09 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.96-7.89 (m, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.56 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.07 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.38 (s, 2H), 4.13 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.13-2.01 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 543.1, 545.1 (M+1).

Preparation 33 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-N—(N-(4-cyanophenyl) sulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with N-(4-cyanophenyl)sulfamide and purification by silica gel column chromatography using 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.12 g, 56%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.61 (br s, 1H), 11.40 (br s, 1H), 8.07-8.05 (m, 1H), 7.98-7.95 (m, 1H), 7.80 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.75 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.03 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.11 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 2H), 2.12-2.01 (m, 1H), 0.99 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 551.1, 553.1 (M−1).

Preparation 34 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-(pyridin-3-ylmethyl)sulfamoyl)benzamide 2,2,2-trifluoroacetate

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with N-(pyridin-3-ylmethyl)sulfamide and purification by HPLC method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.07 g, 27%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.82-8.74 (m, 1H), 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.64 (d, J=4.7 Hz, 1H), 8.12 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.10-8.07 (m, 1H), 8.01-7.98 (m, 1H), 7.72-7.64 (m, 2H), 7.06 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.34 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 2H), 4.13 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 2.14-2.01 (m, 1H), 1.00 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 543.1, 545.1 (M+1).

Preparation 35 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with sulfamide and trituration in hexanes, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (2.31 g, 95%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.95 (br s, 1H), 7.87 (dd, J=7.1, 0.8 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.68 (s, 2H), 7.62 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (dd, J=8.8, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (dd, J=10.8, 0.7 Hz, 1H); MS (ES−) m/z 445.0, 447.0 (M−1).

Preparation 36 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-N—(N,N-dibutylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with N,N-dibutylsulfamide and purification by HPLC method A, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.086 g, 38%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.92 (br s, 1H), 8.06-8.03 (m, 1H), 7.97-7.94 (m, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.32-3.20 (m, 5H), 2.11-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.54-1.39 (m, 4H), 1.30-1.15 (m, 4H), 0.99-0.92 (m, 6H), 0.84 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z: 562.1, 564.2 (M−1).

Preparation 37 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(pyrrolidin-1-ylsulfonyl) benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with pyrrolidine-1-sulfonamide and purification by HPLC method A, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.026 g, 13%); ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.87 (br s, 1H), 8.05-8.02 (m, 1H), 7.95-7.93 (m, 1H), 7.88-7.84 (m, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=10.2 Hz, 1H), 4.04 (d, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 3.42-3.33 (m, 4H), 2.11-1.95 (m, 1H), 1.85-1.74 (m, 4H), 0.96 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z: 504.0, 506.0 (M−1).

Preparation 38 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(piperidin-1-ylsulfonyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with 1-piperidinesulfonamide and purification by HPLC method A, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.020 g, 10%); ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.89 (br s, 1H), 8.05-8.03 (m, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.33-3.26 (m, 4H), 2.09-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.57-1.38 (m, 6H), 0.96 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z: 518.1, 520.1 (M−1).

Preparation 39 Synthesis of N-(azepan-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azepane-1-sulfonamide and purification by HPLC method A, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.005 g, 2%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.89 (br s, 1H), 8.05-8.02 (m, 1H), 7.96-7.92 (m, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.40-3.33 (m, 4H), 2.11-1.94 (m, 1H), 1.69-1.56 (m, 4H), 1.55-1.42 (m, 4H), 0.96 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z: 532.0, 534.1 (M−1).

Preparation 40 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-isopropyl-N-methylsulfamoyl) benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with [methyl(propan-2-yl)sulfamoyl]amine and purification by HPLC method A, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.063 g, 33%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.92 (br s, 1H), 8.07-8.02 (m, 1H), 7.97-7.93 (m, 1H), 7.84-7.77 (m, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.12-3.98 (m, 3H), 2.78 (s, 3H), 2.11-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.06 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 6H), 0.96 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z: 506.1, 508.0 (M−1).

Preparation 41 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

To a cold (0° C.) mixture of 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide (Preparation 36) (9.45 g, 1.00 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added a solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in THF (1M, 3.0 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0° C. followed by the addition of iodomethane (62 μL, 1.00 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature over 16 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with hydrochloride acid (1N, 5 mL) and the mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue which was purified using HPLC method B to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.10 g, 21%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.91 (br s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83-7.75 (m, 2H), 7.62 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (dd, J=8.9, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=10.8 Hz, 1H), 2.58 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 3H); MS (ES−) m/z 459.0, 461.0 (M−1).

Preparation 42 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl) phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 41 and making variations as required to replace iodomethane with 1,3-dibromopropane, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.14 g, 28%): H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.03 (br s, 1H), 8.02 (dd, J=7.1, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (dd, J=8.6, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (dd, J=10.9, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 4.07 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.19 (dt, J=7.5, 7.5 Hz, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 485.0, 487.0 (M−1).

Preparation 43 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-((1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-yl)sulfonyl)benzamide

To a mixture of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (Preparation 18) (0.15 g, 0.40 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (0.13 g, 0.80 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated at reflux for 0.75 h and then cooled to ambient temperature. 1-Methyl-1H-imidazole-4-sulfonamide (0.13 g, 0.82 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (0.2 mL, 1.20 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 h. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×200 mL), brine (2×200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue which was purified via HPLC Method A to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.02 g, 11% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.40 (br s, 1H), 8.03-7.74 (m, 5H), 6.99 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.70 (s, 3H), 2.07-1.99 (m, 1H), 0.96 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 515.0, 517.0 (M−1).

Preparation 44 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(indolin-1-ylsulfonyl)benzamide

To a mixture of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (Preparation 18, 0.15 g, 0.40 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (0.13 g, 0.80 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated at reflux for 0.75 h and then cooled to ambient temperature. Indoline-1-sulfonamide (0.16 g, 0.81 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (0.2 mL, 1.20 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×200 mL), brine (2×200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue which was purified via silica gel column chromatography using 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.03 g, 13%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.53 (br s, 1H), 8.02-8.01 (m, 1H), 7.93-7.92 (m, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.22-7.12 (m, 3H), 7.00-6.94 (m, 2H), 4.23 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 4.07 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.09 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 2.09-1.96 (m, 1H), 0.95 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 552.0, 554.0 (M−1).

Preparation 45 Synthesis of N-((1H-imidazol-4-yl)sulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 43, making variations as required to replace 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-sulfonamide with 1H-imidazole-4-sulfonamide and purification by HPLC Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.02 g, 11%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.90 (br s, 1H), 8.03-7.91 (m, 4H), 7.75 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.08-1.99 (m, 1H), 0.96 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 501.0, 503.0 (M−1).

Preparation 46 Synthesis of Methyl 1-(N-(5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoyl)sulfamoyl)piperidine-4-carboxylate

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 43, making variations as required to replace 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-sulfonamide with methyl 1-sulfamoylpiperidine-4-carboxylate and purification by HPLC Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.02 g, 11%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.97 (s, 1H), 8.04-8.03 (m, 1H), 7.94-7.93 (m, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.65-3.53 (m, 5H), 3.04-2.94 (m, 2H), 2.53-2.42 (m, 1H), 2.08-1.97 (m, 1H), 1.90-1.86 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.47 (m, 2H), 0.96 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 576.0, 578.0 (M−1).

Preparation 47 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(pyridin-3-ylsulfonyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 43, making variations as required to replace 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-sulfonamide with pyridine-3-sulfonamide and purification by trituration in methanol (20 mL), the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.03 g, 13%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.08 (s, 1H), 8.86 (d, J=4.3 Hz, 1H), 8.34 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.03-8.02 (m, 1H), 7.94-7.93 (m, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (dd, J=4.9, 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=11.3 Hz, 1H), 4.07 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.07-1.98 (m, 1H), 0.95 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 512.0, 514.0 (M−1).

Preparation 48 Synthesis of Tert-Butyl N-(5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl) oxy)-2-fluorobenzoyl)sulfamoylcarbamate

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 43, making variations as required to replace 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-sulfonamide with tert-butyl sulfamoylcarbamate and purification by HPLC Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.02 g, 10%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.66 (br s, 1H), 11.96 (br s, 1H), 8.05-8.04 (m, 1H), 7.97-7.96 (m, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (d, J=11.0 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.08-1.99 (m, 1H), 1.37 (s, 9H), 0.96 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 550.0, 552.0 (M−1).

Preparation 49 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorobenzyl)oxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

To a mixture of 3,4-dichlorobenzyl alcohol (0.21 g, 1.20 mmol) in DMSO (5 mL) was added potassium tert-butoxide (0.29 g, 2.58 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 5 minutes and 5-chloro-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2,4-difluorobenzamide (Preparation 3) (0.30 g, 1.01 mmol) was added. After 0.5 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×150 mL), brine (150 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue which was purified by HPLC using Method A. The title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.03 g, 7%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.78 (s, 1H), 7.75-7.66 (m, 3H), 7.43 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J=12.1 Hz, 1H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 2.83 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 453.0, 455.0 (M−1).

Preparation 50 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide

To a mixture of 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (Preparation 4) (1.04 g, 2.69 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (70 mL) was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (1.09 g, 6.72 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 40 minutes and then cooled to ambient temperature. Sulfamide (0.65 g, 6.77 mmol) was added followed by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (1.2 mL, 8.0 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 d. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×200 mL), brine (2×200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue which was triturated in diethyl ether (20 mL) to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.43 g, 34% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.90 (s, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.65-7.58 (m, 3H), 7.49 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=10.6 Hz, 1H), 7.17-7.13 (m, 1H); MS (ES−) m/z 460.9, 462.9 (M−1).

Preparation 51 and 52 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide and 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

To a cold (0° C.) mixture of 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide (Preparation 51) (0.37 g, 0.81 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) was added a 1.0 M solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in tetrahydrofuran (2.4 mL, 2.4 mmol). Iodomethane (0.06 mL, 0.99 mmol) was added after 1 h and at 4 h (0.02 mL, 0.32 mmol). After stirring for 6 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), washed with 1N hydrochloric acid (2×200 mL), brine (2×200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a residue that was purified by HPLC using Method A to provide pure separated 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide and 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide. Data for first eluting compound: a white solid (0.03 g, 6% yield), (Preparation 51): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.90 (s, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.76-7.75 (m, 1H), 7.60 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J=10.6 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd, J=2.4, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 2.54 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 3H); MS (ES−) m/z 474.9, 476.9 (M−1). Data for second eluting compound: a white solid (0.03 g, 7% yield), (Preparation 52): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) delta 12.00 (s, 1H), 7.92 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=10.6 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd, J=2.4, 9.1 Hz, 1H), 2.85 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 488.9, 490.9 (M−1).

Preparation 53 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 50, making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (Preparation 16), the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.508 g, 94%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.91 (s, 1H), 8.33 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (s, 2H), 7.34 (d, J=10.9 Hz, 1H); MS (ES−) m/z 411.9, 413.9 (M−1).

Preparation 54 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yl)oxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 52, making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide with 5-chloro-4-((5,6-dichloropyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide (Preparation 53) and purification by HPLC using Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.03 g, 7% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.96 (br s, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J=10.9 Hz, 1H), 2.84 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 440.0, 442.0 (M−1).

Preparation 55 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 51, making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (Preparation 6) and trituration in diethyl ether (20 mL), the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.508 g, 94%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.00 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.70-7.68 (m, 3H), 7.61 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (tt, J=5.2, 51.9 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 4.86 (t, J=14.1 Hz, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 522.0, 524.0 (M−1).

Preparation 56 Synthesis of 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2,5-difluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2,5-difluorobenzoic acid (PREPARATION WO2012007883A1) and purification by HPLC using Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.14 g, 14%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.95 (s, 1H), 7.77 (dd, J=10.6, 6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (dd, J=9.1, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (dd, J=10.4, 6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (dd, J=9.1, 3.0 Hz, 1H), 2.85 (s, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 474.98, 476.97 (M+1).

Preparation 57 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yloxy)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (PREPARATION 19) and purification by HPLC using Method A, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.06 g, 11%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.91 (s, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 7.01-6.43 (m, 1H), 4.91 (t, J=14.1 Hz, 2H), 2.85 (s, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 536.2, 535.2 (M+1).

Preparation 58 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (PREPARATION 19), N,N-dimethylsulfamide with (methylsulfamoyl)amine, and purification by HPLC method C, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.057 g, 29%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.00 (br s, 1H), 8.15 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 8.09 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.79-7.73 (m, 1H), 7.14 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 6.66 (tt, 1H, J=51.9, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 4.94 (t, J=14.1 Hz, 2H), 2.56 (d, J=4.1 Hz, 3H); MS (ES−) m/z 522.0, 524.0 (M−1).

Preparation 59 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-sulfamoylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 27 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yloxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (PREPARATION 19), N,N-dimethylsulfamide with sulfamide, and purification by HPLC method C, the title compound was obtained as a white solid (0.412 g, 40%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.15 (s, 1H), 8.15 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (s, 2H), 7.11 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 6.66 (tt, J=51.9, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 4.94 (t, J=14.1 Hz, 2H); 19F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ −110.2 (s, 1F), −124.6 (t, J=5.3 Hz, 2F), −138.5 (t, J=5.3 Hz, 2F); MS (ES−) m/z 508.0, 510.0 (M−1).

Preparation 60 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxy-pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 2,4-difluoro-5-iodobenzoate

To a solution of 2,4-difluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid (PREPARATION WO 2005113508A1, 20.0 g, 70.4 mmol) in THF (200 mL) was added di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (30.7 g, 141 mmol) and N,N-dimethyl-4-aminopyridine (1.72 g, 14.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 h then diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (3×100 mL), IN hydrochloric acid (3×100 mL), brine (3×100 mL), dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a colorless solid (20.1 g, 84% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.34 (dd, J=7.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.88 (dd, J=10.3, 7.7 Hz, 1H), 1.59 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 5 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate (PREPARATION WO 2012007883A1) with tert-butyl 2,4-difluoro-5-iodobenzoate and 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol with 5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-ol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (8.88 g, 92%): MS (ES+) m/z 507.0, 509.1 (M+1).

Step 3. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoate

To a mixture of tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate (0.75 g, 1.48 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) was added cyclopropylboronic acid (0.38 g, 4.44 mmol), potassium phosphate tribasic (1.26 g, 5.92 mmol), and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0.17 g, 0.15 mmol). The reaction mixture was thoroughly degassed by passing argon and then heated in a microwave to 150° C. for 0.5 h. After cooling to ambient temperature, the reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and filtered over sodium sulfate. Removal of all volatiles under reduced pressure gave a residue which was purified by column chromatography using gradient of 0-15% ethyl acetate in hexanes as eluent to afford the title compound as a colorless oil (0.70 g, quant. yield): MS (ES−) m/z 422.1, 424.1 (M−1).

Step 4. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoate and purification by column chromatography using gradient of 0-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes as an eluent, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.49 g, 91% yield): MS (ES−) m/z 346.2, 366.2 (M−1).

Step 5. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxy-pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide and purification by reverse phase HPLC, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.05 g, 10% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.79 (br s, 1H), 8.03 (d, 1H, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 6.83 (d, J=11.5 Hz, 1H), 5.33-5.22 (m, 1H), 4.04 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.22-2.06 (m, 3H), 1.34 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H), 0.98-0.90 (m, 2H), 0.83-0.77 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 482.3, 484.3 (M−1).

Preparation 61 Synthesis of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 27 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-isobutoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with (methylsulfamoyl)amine and purification by reverse phase HPLC, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.27 g, 44% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.68 (s, 1H), 8.02 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.70-7.63 (m, 1H), 7.23 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 6.81 (d, J=11.5 Hz, 1H), 5.34-5.20 (m, 1H), 2.55 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 3H), 2.16-2.04 (m, 1H), 1.34 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H), 0.98-0.90 (m, 2H), 0.83-0.76 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 456.2, 458.2 (M−1).

Preparation 62 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-cyclopropylbenzamide Step 1. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-cyclopropylbenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-cyclopropylbenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a yellowish oil (0.35 g, 86% yield), which was used without further purification in the next step: MS (ES+) m/z 346.3, 348.3 (M−1).

Step 2. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-cyclopropylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-cyclopropylbenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide and purification by reverse phase HPLC, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.05 g, 10% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.80 (br s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (dd, J=8.6, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.31-5.22 (m, 1H), 4.02 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.22-2.07 (m, 3H), 1.33 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H), 1.02-0.94 (m, 2H), 0.87-0.80 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 466.2, 468.1 (M+1).

Preparation 63 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl) benzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoate

To a cold (−40° C.) mixture of tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate (2.03 g, 4.0 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) was added isopropylmagnesium chloride lithium chloride complex (3.53 mL of a 1.7 M solution in tetrahydrofuran, 6.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at −40° C., then added oxetan-3-one (0.86 g, 12.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and stirred for 16 h. After the reaction mixture was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride solution (5 mL), the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (5 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography using gradient of 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexanes as eluent to afford the title compound as an amorphous solid (1.05 g, 58% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.87-7.83 (m, 2H), 7.40 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.43 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1H), 5.36-5.26 (m, 1H), 5.15 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 4.86 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 2H), 3.09-2.97 (m, 1H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 1.39 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H).

Step 2. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless oil (0.27 g, quant. yield), which was used without further purification: MS (ES−) m/z 398.1, 400.1 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl) benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide and purification by reverse phase HPLC, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.03 g, 10% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.91 (br s, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 6.30 (s, 1H), 5.35-5.23 (m, 1H), 5.13 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 4.68 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 4.01 (t, J=7.6, 7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.21-2.08 (m, 2H), 1.34 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ −110.0 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 514.2, 516.2 (M−1).

Preparation 64 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-fluorooxetan-3-yl)benzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-fluorooxetan-3-yl)benzoate

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoate (0.45 g, 1.0 mmol) in anhydrous dichloromethane (10 mL) was added diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (0.17 mL, 1.30 mmol) at −78° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at −78° C., warmed to −20° C., and then quenched by addition of 1N sodium hydroxide solution (5 mL). The mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine (5 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography using a gradient of 0-35% ethyl acetate in hexanes as eluent to afford the title compound as a colorless oil (0.25 g, 55% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.91-7.84 (m, 2H), 7.40 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 6.45 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1H), 5.36-5.26 (m, 1H), 5.24 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 5.15 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 5.11 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 5.04 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 1.39 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, CDCl₃) δ −101.83 (d, J=5.4 Hz, 1F), −135.03 (d, J=5.4 Hz, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 456.2, 458.2 (M+1).

Step 2. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-fluorooxetan-3-yl)benzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-fluorooxetan-3-yl)benzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.22 g, quant. yield), which was used without further purification: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.48 (br s, 1H), 8.04 (dd, J=7.8, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 6.52 (d, J=11.5 Hz, 1H), 5.36-5.27 (m, 2H), 5.23 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.18 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 5.11 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 1.40 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, CDCl₃) δ −99.5 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1F), −136.05 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 398.2, 400.2 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-fluorooxetan-3-yl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-(3-fluorooxetan-3-yl)benzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide and purification by reverse phase HPLC, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.09 g, 33% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.95 (br s, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (dd, J=7.6, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=11.7 Hz, 1H), 5.30 (dd, J=26.1, 9.1 Hz, 2H), 5.30-5.22 (m, 1H), 4.96 (dd, J=22.1, 9.0 Hz, 2H), 4.06 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.23-2.11 (m, 2H), 1.35 (d, 6H, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ −106.0 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 1F), −132.5 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 516.1, 518.1 (M−1).

Preparation 65 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 3-bromo-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)benzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 5 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 3-bromo-4-fluorobenzoate (WO2012007883A1), the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (28.8 g, 95%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.25 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5, 1H), 7.31-7.26 (m, 1H), 7.06 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.88 (dd, J=9.1, 2.9 Hz, 1H), 1.57 (s, 9H); MS (ES+) m/z 467.0, 469.1 (M+1).

Step 2. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 63, Step 1 and making non-critical variations to replace tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate with tert-butyl 3-bromo-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)benzoate, the title compound was obtained as solid (1.00 g, 63% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.96 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.93-7.87 (m, 1H), 7.33-7.27 (m, 1H), 7.14 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 6.98-6.92 (m, 1H), 6.83 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.15 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 4.83 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 3.38 (br s, 1H), 1.55 (s, 9H); MS (ES+) m/z 461.1, 463.1 (M+1).

Step 3. Preparation of 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoate, the title compound was obtained as a solid (0.60 g, quant. yield): MS (ES−) m/z 403.2, 405.2 (M−1).

Step 4. Preparation of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(3-hydroxyoxetan-3-yl)benzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide and purification by reverse phase HPLC (Prep Method D), the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.06 g, 16%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.86 (br s, 1H), 8.01 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (dd, J=8.8, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.63-7.57 (m, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (dd, J=9.1, 2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 6.24 (s, 1H), 5.09 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.65 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.02 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.18-2.05 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 523.2, 525.2 (M+1).

Preparation 66 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzamide Step 1. Preparation of Methyl 3-bromo-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)benzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 5 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate with methyl 3-bromo-4-fluorobenzoate (WO2012007883A1), the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (5.60 g, 63%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.31 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (dd, J=8.5, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.27 (m, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 6.96 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 6.90 (dd, J=9.1, 2.9 Hz, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H).

Step 2. Preparation of Methyl 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoate

A degassed mixture of methyl 3-bromo-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)benzoate (1.5 g, 3.52 mmol), (2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)boronic acid (0.81 g, 5.28 mmol) and 2.0 M sodium carbonate (7.0 mL, 14.1 mmol) in dimethoxyethane (40 mL) was treated with tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0.20 g, 0.18 mmol). The resulting mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 7 h. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL), washed with water (100 mL), saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL), brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered through celite and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (R_(f)=0.4 in 4:1 hexanes in ethyl acetate) to provide the title compound (1.26 g, 79% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.16-8.12 (m, 1H), 8.07-8.00 (m, 2H), 7.54-7.49 (m, 1H), 7.25-7.18 (m, 1H), 7.06-6.99 (m, 2H), 6.94-6.89 (m, 1H), 6.88-6.82 (m, 1H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 3H); MS (ES+) m/z 454.0, 456.0 (M+1).

Step 3. Preparation of 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoic Acid

A mixture of methyl 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoate (1.26 g, 2.78 mmol) and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (0.35 g, 8.34 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (35 mL) and water (15 mL) was refluxed for 3 h. The mixture was acidified with 3.0 M hydrochloric acid and extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The organic layer was washed with brine (2×100 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to provide the title compound (1.22 g, quant. yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.97 (br s, 1H), 8.13 (dd, J=5.0, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (dd, J=8.6, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (dd, J=7.3, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52-7.47 (m, 1H), 7.25 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.05-6.98 (m, 2H), 3.67 (s, 3H); MS (ES+) m/z 440.0, 442.0 (M+1).

Step 4. Preparation of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzamide

A solution of 4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoic acid (0.35 g, 0.68 mmol) and 1,1′carbonyldiimidazole (0.22 g, 1.36 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) was refluxed under nitrogen for 2 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient temperature and treated with sulfamide (0.13, 1.36 mmol) and 1,8-diazabicycloundec-7-ene (0.31 mL, 2.05 mmol) and stirred for 16 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), washed with 1.0 M hydrochloric acid (2×40 mL), brine (60 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered through celite, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in anhydrous dimethylformamide (12 mL), cooled to 0° C., and treated with 1.0 M lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in tetrahydrofuran (2.4 mL, 2.4 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 3 h and then treated with 1,3-dibromopropane (0.080 mL, 0.80 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h and then quenched with water (0.5 mL). The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (80 mL), washed with 1.0 M hydrochloric acid (40 mL), brine (2×60 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered through celite, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by by reverse phase HPLC (Prep Method E) to provide the title compound (0.070 g, 16%): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.89 (br s, 1H), 8.16 (dd, J=5.0, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.04-7.97 (m, 2H), 7.78-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.59-7.54 (m, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.18 (m, 1H), 7.12-7.05 (m, 2H), 4.12-4.01 (m, 4H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 2.22-2.10 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z: 558.09, 560.08 (M+H).

Preparation 67. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide Step 1. Preparation of 1-tert-butyl 4-methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoroterephthalate

To a −40° C. solution of methyl 4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzoate (8.00 g, 30 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (150 mL) was added a solution of isopropylmagnesium chloride in tetrahydrofuran (2.0 M, 30 mL, 60 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 2 h at −40° C. Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (13.1 g, 60 mmol) was added. The reaction solution was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and stirred for 20 h. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate (300 mL), washed with 1 M hydrochloric acid (2×300 mL), brine (300 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a colorless syrup (8.89 g, quant. yield): H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.87 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=10.3 Hz, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 1.56 (s, 9H); MS (ES+) m/z 233.0, 235.0 (M−55).

Step 2. Preparation of 1-tert-butyl 4-methyl 5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoroterephthalate

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoroterephthalate (9.00 g, 31.2 mmol) in toluene (150 mL) and water (15 mL) was added tribasic potassium phosphate (19.9 g, 93.6 mmol), cyclopropylboronic acid (13.4 g, 156 mmol), tricyclohexylphosphine tetrafluoroborate (6.92 g, 18.8 mmol), and palladium(II) acetate trimer (2.11 g, 9.4 mmol). The reaction vessel was evacuated and released to an argon atmosphere twice, then heated to reflux under an argon atmosphere for 2 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient temperature, filtered through a pad of diatomaceous earth and rinsed with ethyl acetate (400 mL). The filtrate was washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (2×400 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-10% ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford the title compound as a beige solid (7.02 g, 77% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.50-7.46 (m, 2H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 2.56-2.46 (m, 1H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 0.98-0.93 (m, 2H), 0.68-0.63 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 239.1 (M −55).

Step 3. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate

To a solution of 1-tert-butyl 4-methyl 5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoroterephthalate (1.50 g, 5.08 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (30 mL) was added anhydrous methanol (0.61 mL, 15 mmol) and sodium borohydride (0.583 g, 15.4 mmol). The mixture was refluxed for 9 h, cooled to ambient temperature. The reaction was quenched by slow addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (10 mL) and diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL). The mixture was washed with 1 M hydrochloric acid (200 mL) and brine (200 mL), then dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-30% ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford the title compound as a colorless solid (0.90 g, 67% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.45 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 4.86 (s, 2H), 2.39 (br s, 1H), 1.78-1.68 (m, 1H), 1.55 (s, 9H), 0.92-0.86 (m, 2H), 0.63-0.58 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 289.1 (M+23).

Step 4. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate with tert-butyl 5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate and to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 3,5-dichlorophenol, the title compound was obtained as a light yellow syrup (0.62 g, 83% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.56 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=11.3 Hz, 1H), 6.98-6.97 (m, 1H), 6.86-6.85 (m, 2H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 1.85-1.76 (m, 1H), 1.57 (s, 9H), 1.00-0.93 (m, 2H), 0.72-0.66 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 411.1, 413.1 (M+1).

Step 5. Preparation of 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.52 g, 97% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.2 (br s, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 7.22-7.21 (m, 2H), 7.18-7.17 (m, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 2.03-1.94 (m, 1H), 0.95-0.89 (m, 2H), 0.65-0.60 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 353.2, 355.2 (M−1).

Step 6. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

To a solution of 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid (0.16 g, 0.45 mmol) in anhydrous dichloromethane (10 mL) was added 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (0.26 g, 1.33 mmol) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (0.17 g, 1.38 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 5 minutes, followed by the addition of azetidine-1-sulfonamide (0.16 g, 1.15 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 16 h, then diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL), washed with 1 M hydrochloric acid (2×100 mL), brine (2×100 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was triturated in diethyl ether (10 mL) to afford the title compound as a colorless solid (0.130 g, 61% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.89 (br s, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.18 (m, 4H), 5.33 (s, 2H), 4.03 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H), 2.20-2.10 (m, 2H), 2.04-1.95 (m, 1H), 0.95-0.89 (m, 2H), 0.74-0.69 (m, 2H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ −117.2 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 471.1, 473.1 (M−1).

Preparation 68. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenz amide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in Preparation 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate with tert-butyl 5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate and to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless syrup (1.29 g, 83% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.57 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 6.89-6.86 (m, 2H), 6.73 (s, 1H), 5.20 (s, 2H), 1.86-1.76 (m, 1H), 1.57 (s, 9H), 0.99-0.93 (m, 2H), 0.72-0.66 (m, 2H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, CDCl₃) δ −57.8 (s, 3F), −112.8 (s, 1F); MS (ES+) m/z 461.1, 463.1 (M+1).

Step 2. Synthesis of 4-((3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (1.13 g, quant. yield): 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.20 (br s, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 7.31-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.14-7.12 (m, 2H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 2.03-1.94 (m, 1H), 0.96-0.89 (m, 2H), 0.66-0.60 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 403.1, 405.1 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 67, Step 6 and making variations as required to replace 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((3-chloro-5-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic acid, the title compound was obtained following trituration in a 1:1 mixture of diethyl ether and hexanes as a colorless solid (0.08 g, 47% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.89 (br s, 1H), 7.42 (d, J=11.1 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 7.24 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.12 (m, 2H), 5.35 (s, 2H), 4.03 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.20-2.10 (m, 2H), 2.04-1.96 (m, 1H), 0.95-0.89 (m, 2H), 0.74-0.69 (m, 2H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ −56.8 (s, 3F), −117.2 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 521.1, 523.1 (M−1).

Preparation 69. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzamide Step 1. Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridine

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 11 and making non-critical variations as required to replace 2-methylpropan-1-ol with 2,2,2-trifluoro ethanol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless liquid (32.8 g, 95% yield): MS (ES+) m/z 316.9, 314.9 (M+1).

Step 2. Synthesis of 3-chloro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridine

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 12 and making non-critical variations as required to replace 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-isobutoxypyridine with 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridine, the title compound was obtained as a colorless gum (20.1 g, 99% yield): MS (ES+) m/z 338.1, 340.1 (M+1).

Step 3. Synthesis of 5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-ol

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 13 and making non-critical variations as required to replace 3-chloro-2-isobutoxy-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine with 3-chloro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridine, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (11.3 g, 84% yield): MS (ES+) m/z 228.1, 230.1 (M+1).

Step 4. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 5 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 2,4-difluoro-5-iodobenzoate (PREPARATION 60, Step 1) and to replace 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol with 5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-ol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (5.10 g, 93%): MS (ES+) m/z 547.9, 549.9 (M+1).

Step 5. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 66, Step 2 and making non-critical variations to replace 3-bromo-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)benzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate and to replace (2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)boronic acid with 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-vinyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolane, the title compound was obtained as a pale yellow gum (1.54 g, 54% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.61 (d, J=14.9 Hz, 1H), 8.34 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.48 (d, J=13.0 Hz, 1H), 5.90 (d, J=17.7 Hz, 1H), 5.45 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.85-4.77 (m, 2H), 1.62 (3, 9H).

Step 6. Synthesis of 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making non-critical variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.71 g, 53% yield): MS (ES+) m/z 391.9, 393.9 (M+1).

Step 7. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 67, Step 6 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoic acid, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.05 g, 45% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.61 (d, J=14.9 Hz, 1H), 8.34 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.00-6.91 (m, 1H), 6.48 (d, J=13.0 Hz, 1H), 5.90 (d, J=17.7 Hz, 1H), 5.45 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.85-4.77 (m, 2H), 4.25 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.33-2.23 (m, 2H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, CDCl₃) δ −73.7 (s, 3F), −108.6 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 508.1, 510.1 (M−1).

Preparation 70. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro benzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 60, Step 1 and making non-critical variations to replace tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate and making non-critical variations to replace microwave heating to 150° C. for 0.5 h with refluxing in dioxane for 16 h, the title compound was obtained as a gum (1.20 g, 71% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.38 (dd, J=7.8, 1.1 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (dd, J=2.6, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=2.5, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 6.48 (d, J=11.2, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 4.85-4.77 (m, 2H), 2.16-2.07 (m, 1H), 1.60 (s, 9H), 1.04-0.91 (m, 2H), 0.83-0.73 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 462.0, 464.0 (M+1).

Step 2. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a gum (1.10 g, 83% yield) which was used directly without any further purification: MS (ES+) m/z 405.1, 407.1 (M+1).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro Benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 67, Step 6 and making non-critical variations to replace -cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-5-cyclopropyl-2-fluorobenzoic acid, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.04 g, 12% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.62 (br s, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.48 (d, J=12.9 Hz, 1H), 4.85-4.77 (m, 2H), 4.24 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.32-2.21 (m, 2H), 2.16-2.07 (m, 1H), 1.04-0.73 (m, 4H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, CDCl₃) δ −73.7 (s, 3F), −111.2 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 522.1, 524.0 (M−1).

Preparation 71 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 5 and making variations as required to replace 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol with 5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-ol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (3.86 g, 85% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.98 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (d, J=10.9 Hz, 1H), 4.87-4.78 (m, 2H), 1.61 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Preparation of 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.44 g, 59% yield): MS (ES+) m/z 399.9, 401.9 (M+1).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 67, Step 6 and making variations as required to replace 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,5-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro-6-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.05 g, 34% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.58 (d, J=14.2 Hz, 1H), 8.25 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=7.5, 1H), 6.59 (d, J=12.4 Hz, 1H), 4.86-4.78 (m, 2H), 4.24 (t, J=15.5 Hz, 4H), 2.33-2.22 (m, 2H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, CDCl₃) δ −73.7 (s, 3F), −108.8 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 516.0, 518.0 (M−1).

Preparation 72. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzamide Step 1. Preparation of Methyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 66, Step 2 and making non-critical variations to replace 3-bromo-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)benzoate with methyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-iodobenzoate and to replace (2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)boronic acid with 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-vinyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolane, the title compound as a colorless solid (0.17 g, 16% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.15 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 6.96 (dd, J=11.2, 17.7 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (d, J=11.7 Hz, 1H), 5.83 (d, J=17.6 Hz, 1H), 5.38 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 5.35-5.26 (m, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 1.39 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 366.0, 368.0 (M+1).

Step 2. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoic Acid

To a solution of methyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoate (0.17 g, 0.47 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and water (5 mL) was added lithium hydroxide (0.09 g, 3.8 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux for 1.5 h and cooled to ambient temperature. The mixture was diluted with 1 M hydrochloric acid (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2×100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a colorless solid (0.16 g, 96% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 10.54 (br s, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (dd, J=11.2, 17.7 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (d, J=11.7 Hz, 1H), 5.84 (d, J=17.6 Hz, 1H), 5.40 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1H), 5.35-5.27 (m, 1H), 1.40 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 550.2, 552.2 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-5-vinylbenzoic acid and to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.19 g, 49% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.19 (br s, 1H), 8.31 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (dd, J=11.3, 17.8 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=11.5 Hz, 1H), 6.29 (d, J=17.2 Hz, 1H), 5.72 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 5.60-5.52 (m, 1H), 4.35 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.52-2.41 (m, 2H), 1.62 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); ¹⁹F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ −106.0 (s, 1F); MS (ES−) m/z 468.1, 470.1 (M−1).

Preparation 73. Synthesis of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 3-bromo-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)benzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 5 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-2,4-difluorobenzoate with and tert-butyl 3-bromo-4-fluorobenzoate and 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol with 5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-ol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless syrup (1.47 g, 76% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.21 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.86-7.82 (m, 2H), 7.37 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.79 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.35-5.22 (m, 1H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 1.37 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 442.0, 444.0 (M+1).

Step 2. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 66, Step 2 and making non-critical variations to replace methyl 3-bromo-4-fluorobenzoate with 3-bromo-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)benzoate, the title compound as a colorless foam (0.56 g, 67% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.18-8.16 (m, 1H), 7.94-7.92 (m, 2H), 7.78-7.77 (m, 1H), 7.57-7.55 (m, 1H), 7.34-7.33 (m, 1H), 6.95 (dd, J=5.4, 6.9 Hz, 1H), 6.87-6.84 (m, 1H), 5.32-5.19 (m, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 1.36 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 471.1, 473.1 (M+1).

Step 3. Preparation of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless syrup (0.92 g, quant. yield): 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 12.43 (br s, 1H), 8.38 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 1H), 8.23-8.10 (m, 3H), 7.90 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.50-7.45 (m, 2H), 6.93 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 5.28-5.16 (m, 1H), 4.30 (s, 3H), 1.40 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 415.0, 417.0 (M+1).

Step 4. Synthesis of 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with methyl sulfamide, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.23 g, 76% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.71 (br s, 1H), 8.18 (dd, J=1.9, 5.0 Hz, 1H), 7.98-7.90 (m, 3H), 7.76 (dd, J=1.9, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.60-7.55 (m, 1H), 7.07 (dd, J=5.0, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.27-5.15 (m, 1H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 2.51-2.50 (m, 3H), 1.28 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 505.2, 507.2 (M−1).

Preparation 74. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 4-((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)-3-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzoic acid and to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained as a colourless solid (0.05 g, 14% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.78 (br s, 1H), 8.18 (dd, J=1.8, 5.0 Hz, 1H), 7.99-7.90 (m, 3H), 7.77 (dd, J=1.8, 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (dd, J=5.0, 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.28-5.15 (m, 1H), 4.03 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 2.17-2.06 (m, 2H), 1.29 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 531.2, 533.2 (M−1).

Preparation 75. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide Step 1. Preparation of Tert-Butyl 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate with tert-butyl 5-cyclopropyl-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate and to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-trifluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 3,4-dichlorophenol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless syrup (0.46 g, 53% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 7.53 (d, J=8.9, 1H), 7.41-7.32 (m, 3H), 7.10-7.06 (m, 1H), 5.31 (s, 1H), 2.02-1.93 (m, 1H), 1.49 (s, 9H), 0.95-0.88 (m, 2H), 0.65-0.60 (m, 2H); MS (ES+) m/z 354.9, 356.9 (M+1).

Step 2. Preparation of 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making non-critical variations to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid that was carried forward without further characterization (0.32 g, 75% yield).

Step 3. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-cyclopropyl-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.12 g, 51% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.72 (d, J=15.1 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.37-7.29 (m, 2H), 7.08 (d, J=2.9, 1H), 6.86-6.82 (m, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 4.25 (t, J=7.8, 4H), 2.32-2.22 (m, 2H), 1.87-1.78 (m, 1H), 1.05-0.99 (m, 2H), 0.77-0.71 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 471.0, 473.0 (M−1).

Preparation 76. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide Step 1. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 4-(((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)methyl)-5-chloro-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 67, Step 1 and making non-critical variations to replace methyl 4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzoate with ((4-bromo-2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl)oxy)(tert-butyl)dimethylsilane (PREPARATION 10), the title compound was obtained as a light yellow oil (16.0 g, quant. yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.75 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1H), 4.70 (s, 2H), 1.55 (s, 9H), 0.93 (s, 9H), 0.10 (s, 6H).

Step 2. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate

To a 0° C. solution of tert-butyl 4-(((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)methyl)-5-chloro-2-fluorobenzoate (4.90 g, 13.1 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was added a solution of tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride (1.0 M in tetrahydrofuran, 14.5 mL, 14.5 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 0° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere for 1.5 h, then diluted with ethyl acetate (300 mL), washed with brine (2×300 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography eluting with a 0-30% gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford the title compound as a colorless syrup (3.08 g, 91% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.73 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=11.2 Hz, 1H), 4.72 (s, 2H), 2.68 (br s, 1H), 1.55 (s, 9H).

Step 3. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate and to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-trifluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 3,4-dichlorophenol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.73 g, 63% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.87 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.36-7.29 (m, 2H), 7.07 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (dd, J=2.9, 8.9 Hz, 1H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 1.58 (s, 9H).

Step 4. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.61 g, 98% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.62 (br s, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.59-7.52 (m, 2H), 7.40 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (dd, J=2.9, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.19 (s, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 347.1, 349.1 (M−1).

Step 5. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with methylsulfamide, the title compound was obtained following purification by reverse-phase HPLC as a colorless solid (0.03 g, 8% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.95 (br s, 1H), 7.76 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 2H), 7.59 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (dd, J=2.9, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.20 (s, 2H), 2.54 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 3H); MS (ES−) m/z 439.0, 441.0 (M−1).

Preparation 77. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making variations as required to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((3,4-dichlorophenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and to replace N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained following purification by reverse-phase HPLC as a colorless solid (0.04 g, 10% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.09 (br s, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (dd, J=2.9, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.21 (s, 2H), 4.02 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.20-2.10 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 465.0, 467.0 (M −1).

Preparation 78. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide Step 1. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate and to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-trifluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.33 g, 31% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.88 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.29 (m, 2H), 7.04 (dd, J=2.9, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.13 (s, 2H), 1.58 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.55 g, quant. yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.62 (br s, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.65-7.60 (m, 2H), 7.52 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (dd, J=2.9, 8.9 Hz, 1H), 5.26 (s, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 381.1, 383.1 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with methylsulfamide, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.15 g, 44% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.96 (br s, 1H), 7.79-7.75 (m, 2H), 7.66-7.62 (m, 2H), 7.52 (d, J=2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (dd, J=2.9, 8.9 Hz, 1H), 5.26 (s, 2H), 2.55 (d, J=4.1 Hz, 3H); MS (ES−) m/z 473.1, 475.1 (M−1).

Preparation 79. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained following purification by reverse-phase HPLC as a colorless solid (0.01 g, 3% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.11 (br s, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.66-7.62 (m, 2H), 7.52 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (dd, J=8.9, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 5.27 (s, 2H), 4.02 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.20-2.10 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 499.0, 501.0 (M-1).

Preparation 80. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide Step 1. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace methyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-2-fluoro-4-(hydroxymethyl)benzoate and to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-trifluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (1.04 g, 80% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.87 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=10.8 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.23 (m, 2H), 7.07 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 6.86 (dd, J=3.0, 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.10 (s, 2H), 1.58 (s, 9H).

Step 2. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.88 g, 99% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.62 (br s, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (d, J=11.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52-7.48 (m, 1H), 7.44 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd, J=3.0, 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 397.0, 399.0 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with methylsulfamide, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.18 g, 55% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.96 (br s, 1H), 7.79-7.75 (m, 2H), 7.60 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 7.52-7.49 (m, 1H), 7.44 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd, J=3.0, 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 2.55 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 3H); MS (ES−) m/z 489.1, 491.1 (M−1).

Preparation 81. Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-((3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained following purification by reverse-phase HPLC as a colorless solid (0.021 g, 6% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.09 (br s, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 7.52-7.48 (m, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd, J=9.1, 3.0 Hz, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 4.03 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.21-2.10 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 515.1, 517.1 (M−1).

Preparation 82 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide Step 1. Synthesis of Tert-Butyl 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 7 and making non-critical variations as required to replace 5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-trifluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-ol with 5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-ol, the title compound was obtained as a colorless syrup (0.72 g, 85% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.84 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (d, J=10.9 Hz, 1H), 5.27-5.15 (m, 1H), 5.06 (s, 2H), 1.56 (s, 9H), 1.33 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES+) m/z 430.1, 432.0 (M+1).

Step 2. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic Acid

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 4 and making variations as required to replace tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoate with tert-butyl 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoate, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.64 g, quant. yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 8.04 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.42 (m, 2H), 6.75 (br s, 1H), 5.24-5.16 (m, 1H), 5.12 (s, 2H), 1.36 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 372.1, 374.1 (M−1).

Step 3. Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluoro-N—(N-methylsulfamoyl)benzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with methylsulfamide, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.19 g, 47% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.93 (br s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.80-7.74 (m, 3H), 7.59 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 5.21-5.12 (m, 3H), 2.55 (d, J=3.8 Hz, 3H), 1.26 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 464.2, 466.2 (M−1).

Preparation 83 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-isopropoxypyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained following purification by reverse-phase HPLC as a colorless solid (0.06 g, 15% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.08 (br s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 5.20-5.12 (m, 3H), 4.03 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.21-2.11 (m, 2H), 1.26 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 490.2, 492.1 (M−1).

Preparation 84 Synthesis of 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-N—(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid, the title compound was obtained as a colorless solid (0.02 g, 4% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.02 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (tt, J=52.1, 5.3 Hz, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 4.85 (t, J=14.1 Hz, 2H), 2.85 (s, 6H); MS (ES−) m/z 550.0, 552.0 (M−1).

Preparation 85 Synthesis of N-(azetidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzamide

Following the procedure as described in PREPARATION 24 and making non-critical variations to replace 5-chloro-4-(4-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenoxy)-2-fluorobenzoic acid with 5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro-6-(2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropoxy)pyridin-3-yl)oxy)methyl)-2-fluorobenzoic acid and N,N-dimethylsulfamide with azetidine-1-sulfonamide, the title compound was obtained following purification by reverse-phase HPLC as a colorless solid (0.04 g, 10% yield): ¹H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 12.07 (br s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (tt, J=51.9, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 5.24 (s, 2H), 4.86 (t, J=14.1 Hz, 2H), 4.04 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 4H), 2.21-2.11 (m, 2H); MS (ES−) m/z 562.1, 564.1 (M−1).

Electrophysiological Assay (In Vitro Assay)

Patch voltage clamp electrophysiology allows for the direct measurement and quantification of block of voltage-gated sodium channels (NaV's), and allows the determination of the time- and voltage-dependence of block which has been interpreted as differential binding to the resting, open, and inactivated states of the sodium channel (Hille, B., Journal of General Physiology (1977), 69: 497-515).

The following patch voltage clamp electrophysiology studies were performed on representative compounds of the invention using human embryonic kidney cells (HEK), permanently transfected with an expression vector containing the full-length cDNA coding for the desired human sodium channel α-subunit, grown in culture media containing 10% FBS, 1% PSG, and 0.5 mg/mL G418 at 37° C. with 5% CO2. HEK cells used for the electrophysiology (EP) recordings had a passage number of less than 40 for all studies and were used within three days from the time of plating. NaV1.7 and NaV1.5 cDNAs (NM_002977 and AC137587; SCN5A, respectively) were stably expressed in HEK-293 cells. The β1 subunit was coexpressed in both the NaV1.7 and NaV1.5 cell lines.

Sodium currents were measured using the patch clamp technique in the whole-cell configuration using either a PatchXpress automated voltage clamp or manually using an Axopatch 200B (Axon Instruments) or Model 2400 (A-M systems) amplifier. The manual voltage clamp protocol was as follows: Borosilicate glass micropipettes were fire-polished to a tip diameter yielding a resistance of 2-4 Mohms in the working solutions. The pipette was filled with a solution comprised of: 5 mM NaCl, 10 mM CsCl, 120 mM CsF, 0.1 mM CaCl2, 2 mM MgCl2, 10 mM HEPES, 10 mM EGTA; and adjusted to pH 7.2 with CsOH. The external solution had the following composition: 140 mM NaCl, 5 mM KCl, 2 mM CaCl2, 1 mM MgCl2, 10 mM HEPES; and adjusted to pH 7.4 with NaOH. In some studies, the external sodium was reduced by equimolar replacement with choline. Osmolarity in the CsF internal and NaCl external solutions was adjusted to 300 mOsm/kg and 310 mOsm/kg with glucose, respectively. All recordings were performed at ambient temperature in a bath chamber with a volume of 150 μL. Control sodium currents were measured in 0.5% DMSO. Controls and representative compounds of the invention were applied to the recording chamber through a 4-pinch or 8-pinch valve bath perfusion system manufactured by ALA Scientific Instruments.

Currents were recorded at 40 kHz sampling frequency, filtered at 5 Hz, and stored using a Digidata-1322A analogue/digital interface with the pClamp software (Axon Instruments). Series resistance compensation was applied (60-80%). Cells were rejected if currents showed inadequate voltage control (as judged by the IV relationship during stepwise activation). All statistics in this study are given as mean±SD.

The membrane potential was maintained at a voltage where inactivation of the channel is complete (which was −60 mV for both NaV1.7 and NaV1.5). The voltage is then stepped back to a very negative (Vhold=150 mV) voltage for 20 ms and then a test pulse is applied to quantify the compound block. The 20 ms brief repolarization was long enough for compound-free channels to completely recover from fast inactivation, but the compound-bound channels recovered more slowly such that negligible recovery could occur during this interval. The percent decrease in sodium current following wash-on of compound was taken as the percent block of sodium channels.

Compounds of the invention, when tested in this model, demonstrated affinities for the inactivated state of NaV1.7 and NaV1.5 as set forth below in Table 1 and Table 2.

Binding Assay

Tritiated compound binding to membranes isolated from cells that heterologously express hNav1.7 and the β1 subunit

Preparation of membranes containing recombinantly expressed sodium channels: Frozen recombinant cell pellets were thawed on ice and diluted to 4 times the cell pellet weight with ice cold 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 buffer. The cell suspensions were homogenized on ice using a motorized glass dounce homogeniser. Homogenates were further diluted 8.4 times with ice cold 50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 buffer and then centrifuged at 200×g at 4° C. for 15 min. The supernatants were collected and centrifuged at 10000×g at 4° C. for 50 min. The pellets were then re-suspended in 100 mM NaCl, 20 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 buffer containing 1% v/v protease inhibitors (Calbiochem) and re-homogenized on ice. The homogenized membranes were then processed through a syringe equipped with a 26 gauge needle. Protein concentrations were determined by Bradford Assay and the membranes were stored at −80° C.

Radioligand Binding Studies: Saturation experiments. A representative compound of formula (I) was tritiated. Three tritiums were incorporated in place of methyl hydrogens to generate [³H]compound. Binding of this radioligand was performed in 5 mL borosilicate glass test tubes at room temperature. Binding was initiated by adding membranes to increasing concentrations of [³H]compound in 100 mM NaCl, 20 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 buffer containing 0.01% w/v bovine serum albumin (BSA) for 18 h. Non-specific binding was determined in the presence of 1 μM unlabelled compound. After 18 h, the reactants were filtered through GF/C glass fiber filters presoaked in 0.5% w/v polyethylene imine. Filters were washed with 15 mL ice cold 100 mM NaCl, 20 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.4 buffer containing 0.25% BSA to separate bound from free ligand. [³H]compound bound to filters was quantified by liquid scintillation counting.

Competitive Binding Experiments.

Binding reactions were performed in 96-well polypropylene plates at room temperature for 18h. In 360 μL, membranes were incubated with 100 pM [³H]compound and increasing concentrations of Test Compound. Non-specific binding was defined in the presence of 1 μM unlabelled compound. Reactions were transferred and filtered through 96-well glass fiber/C filter plates presoaked with 0.5% polyethylene imine. The filtered reactions were washed 5 times with 200 μL ice cold buffer containing 0.25% BSA. Bound radioactivity was determined by liquid scintillation counting.

Data Analysis: For saturation experiments, non-specific binding was subtracted from total binding to provide specific binding and these values were recalculated in terms of pmol ligand bound per mg protein. Saturation curves were constructed and dissociation constants were calculated using the single site ligand binding model: Beq=(Bmax*X)/(X+Kd), where Beq is the amount of ligand bound at equilibrium, Bmax is the maximum receptor density, Kd is the dissociation constant for the ligand, and X is the free ligand concentration. For competition studies percent inhibition was determined and IC₅₀ values were calculated using a 4 parameter logistic model (% inhibition=(A+((B−A)/(1+((x/C)^(∧)D)))) using XLfit, where A and B are the maximal and minimum inhibition respectively, C is the IC₅₀ concentration and D is the (Hill) slope.

Compounds of the invention, when tested in this model, demonstrated affinities for the inactivated state of NaV1.7 membrane binding (as set forth in Table 1 and Table 2).

TABLE 1 NaV1.7 395 Mem- hNaV hNaV brane 1.7 1.5 Binding IC50 IC50 IC50 No. Structure Name μM μM μM 1

5-chloro-4-(4-chloro- 3-(trifluoromethyl) phenoxy)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.053 0.253 2

4-((3,4- dichlorophenoxy) methyl)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.142 1.5587 3

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.011 2.180 0.0248 4

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.009 0.0708 5

5-chloro-4-((3,4- dichlorophenoxy) methyl)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.019 0.1744 6

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(N- methylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.006 7.175 0.0085 7

5-chloro-4-(4-chloro- 3-(trifluoromethyl) phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.1896 1.1313 8

5-chloro-4-(4-chloro- 3-(trifluoromethyl) phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N- (N-methylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.022 0.1087 9

N-(azetidin-1- ylsulfonyl)-5- chloro-4-(4-chloro- 3-(trifluoromethyl) phenoxy)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.016 0.0807 10

5-chloro-4-(3-chloro- 4-(trifluoromethoxy) phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.226 2.0039 11

5-chloro-4-(3-chloro- 4-(trifluoromethoxy) phenoxy)-2-fluoro-N- (N-methylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.015 0.1447 12

5-chloro-4-(3-chloro- 4-(trifluoromethoxy) phenoxy)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.041 0.2184 13

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-N-(N,N- dibutylsulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 3.6407 14

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (pyrrolidin-1- ylsulfonyl)benzamide 0.044 0.0301 15

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (piperidin-1- ylsulfonyl)benzamide 0.064 0.0584 16

N-(azepan-1- ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro- 4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.073 0.5421 17

5-chloro-4-((5- chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (N-isopropyl-N- methylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.125 0.1232 18

N-(N- benzylsulfamoyl)- 5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzamide 4.178 19

N-(N-benzyl-N- methylsulfamoyl)-5- chloro-4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin- 3-yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzamide 4.4361 20

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(N- (pyridin-2-ylmethyl) sulfamoyl)benzamide 2,2,2-trifluoroacetate 2.344 4.2521 21

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin- 3-yl)oxy)-N-(N-(4- cyanophenyl) sulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.828 2.9439 22

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(N- (pyridin-3-ylmethyl) sulfamoyl)benzamide 2,2,2-trifluoroacetate 3.5833 23

5-chloro-4-((3,4- dichlorobenzyl)oxy)- N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.271 1.2529 24

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N-((1- methyl-1H-imidazol-4- yl)sulfonyl)benzamide 0.034 0.5783 25

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (indolin-1-ylsulfonyl) benzamide 0.190 0.3883 26

N-((1H-imidazol-4- yl)sulfonyl)-5-chloro- 4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.009 0.0773 27

1-(N-(5-chloro-4-((5- chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzoyl) sulfamoyl)piperidine- 4-carboxylate 0.218 1.5896 28

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (pyridin-3-ylsulfonyl) benzamide 0.057 0.7034 29

tert-butyl N-(5-chloro- 4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzoyl) sulfamoylcarbamate 0.9047 30

5-chloro-4-(5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yloxy)-N- (N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.034 0.0478 31

4-(3-chloro-4- (trifluoromethoxy) phenoxy)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2,5-difluorobenzamide 0.8604 32

N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 4-fluoro-6-((5-methyl- 3-phenylisoxazol-4- yl)methoxy) nicotinamide 33

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2- fluoro-N-(N- methylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.0228 34

5-chloro-4-((5,6- dichloropyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 4.6781 35

5-chloro-4-((5,6- dichloropyridin-3- yl)oxy)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.6654 36

5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy) methyl)-2-fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.4605 37

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2- fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.1711 38

5-chloro-4-((5,6- dichloropyridin-3-yl) oxy)-2-fluoro-N-(N- methylsulfamoyl) benzamide 0.6275 39

5-chloro-4-(((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy) methyl)-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro benzamide 0.2158 40

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4-((6- isobutoxy-5- (trifluoromethyl) pyridin-3-yl)oxy) benzamide 0.071 41

tert-butyl 4-(N-(5- chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzoyl) sulfamoyl)piperazine- 1-carboxylate 3.803 42

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (piperazin-1- ylsulfonyl)benzamide 0.8559 43

5-chloro-4-(4- cyanophenoxy)- N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 10 44

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(4-(thiazol-2- yl)phenoxy)benzamide 0.869 45

5-chloro-4-(3-chloro- 4-(trifluoromethoxy) phenoxy)-N-(N- cyclobutylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.1083 46

N-(azetidin-1- ylsulfonyl)-5-chloro- 4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.0092 47

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4- (naphthalen-2-yloxy) benzamide 4.07 48

5-chloro-2-fluoro-4- (naphthalen-2-yloxy)- N-sulfamoylbenzamide 0.1385 49

5-chloro-4-(3,4- difluorophenoxy)- N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 3.4665 50

5-chloro-4-(3,4- difluorophenoxy)-2- fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.6562 51

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4-(2- phenoxyethoxy) benzamide 6.6232 52

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4- (naphthalen-1-yloxy) benzamide 5.2 53

5-chloro-2-fluoro-4- (naphthalen-1-yloxy)- N-sulfamoylbenzamide 23 54

4-((1H-indol-5-yl)oxy)- 5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 55

4-((1H-indol-4-yl)oxy)- 5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 20 56

4-((1H-indol-6-yl)oxy)- 5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 0.99 57

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4-(4- methoxyphenethoxy) benzamide 2.4 58

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4- phenethoxybenzamide 1.3 59

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-((2-methyl- 1H-indol-5-yl) oxy)benzamide 5.2 60

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(isoquinolin- 5-yloxy)benzamide 20 61

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(4- (methylsulfonyl) phenoxy)benzamide 20 62

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluoro-4-((1-methyl- 1H-indazol-6- yl)oxy)benzamide 14 63

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-(piperidin-1-yl) pyridin-3-yl)oxy)- N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.14 64

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-((2- methylbenzo[d]thiazol- 6-yl)oxy)benzamide 1.9 65

4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-5-cyano- N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)- 2-fluorobenzamide 0.093 66

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2- fluoro-N-(pyrrolidin- 1-ylsulfonyl)benzamide 0.026 67

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2- fluoro-N- (morpholinosulfonyl) benzamide 0.098 68

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-2-fluoro-N- (morpholinosulfonyl) benzamide 0.077 69

5-chloro-4-((5-chloro- 6-(2,2,3,3- tetrafluoropropoxy) pyridin-3-yl)oxy)-2- fluoro-N-(pyridin-3- ylsulfonyl)benzamide 0.95 70

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethoxy) phenoxy)benzamide 0.34 71

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(quinolin-5- yloxy)benzamide 20 72

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(quinolin-6- yloxy)benzamide 9.6 73

5-chloro-N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluoro-4-(isoquinolin- 7-yloxy)benzamide 20 74

5-chloro-4-(4-cyano- 3,5-dimethylphenoxy)- N-(N,N- dimethylsulfamoyl)-2- fluorobenzamide 11 75

4-((5-chloro-6- isobutoxypyridin-3- yl)oxy)-5-cyano-2- fluoro-N- sulfamoylbenzamide 0.29

TABLE 2 NaV1.7 395 hNaV hNaV Membrane 1.7 1.5 Binding IC50 IC50 IC50 No. Structure μM μM μM 76

0.0343 0.22 77

0.14 78

0.035 79

0.017 80

0.0116 0.028 81

20.2 82

0.0061 0.043 83

0.043 84

0.0084 3.5 0.025 85

0.026 86

0.022 >10 0.011 87

0.0021 1.2 0.006 88

0.044 89

1.3 90

0.006 91

0.0067 2.6 0.005 92

0.0043 0.011 93

0.016 94

0.009 95

0.002 96

0.0003 97

0.052 98

0.009 99

0.051 100

0.043 101

0.068

Analgesia Induced by Sodium Channel Blockers

Heat Induced Tail Flick Latency Test

In this test, the analgesia effect produced by administering a compound of the invention can be observed through heat-induced tail-flick in mice. The test includes a heat source consisting of a projector lamp with a light beam focused and directed to a point on the tail of a mouse being tested. The tail-flick latencies, which are assessed prior to drug treatment, and in response to a noxious heat stimulus, i.e., the response time from applying radiant heat on the dorsal surface of the tail to the occurrence of tail flick, are measured and recorded at 40, 80, 120, and 160 minutes.

For the first part of this study, 65 animals undergo assessment of baseline tail flick latency once a day over two consecutive days. These animals are then randomly assigned to one of the 11 different treatment groups including a vehicle control, a morphine control, and 9 compounds at 30 mg/Kg are administered intramuscularly. Following dose administration, the animals are closely monitored for signs of toxicity including tremor or seizure, hyperactivity, shallow, rapid or depressed breathing and failure to groom. The optimal incubation time for each compound is determined via regression analysis. The analgesic activity of the test compounds is expressed as a percentage of the maximum possible effect (% MPE) and is calculated using the following formula:

$\% \mspace{14mu} {MPE}\mspace{14mu} \frac{{{Postdrug}\mspace{14mu} {latency}} - {{Predrug}\mspace{14mu} {latency}}}{{{Cut}\text{-}{off}\mspace{14mu} {time}\mspace{14mu} \left( {10\mspace{14mu} s} \right)} - {{Predrug}\mspace{14mu} {latency}}} \times 100\%$

Postdrug latency=the latency time for each individual animal taken before the tail is removed (flicked) from the heat source after receiving drug.

Predrug latency=the latency time for each individual animal taken before the tail is flicked from the heat source prior to receiving drug.

Cut-offtime (10 s)=is the maximum exposure to the heat source.

Acute Pain (Formalin Test)

The formalin test is used as an animal model of acute pain. In the formalin test, animals are briefly habituated to the plexiglass test chamber on the day prior to experimental day for 20 minutes. On the test day, animals are randomly injected with the test articles. At 30 minutes after drug administration, 50 μL of 10% formalin is injected subcutaneously into the plantar surface of the left hind paw of the rats. Video data acquisition begins immediately after formalin administration, for duration of 90 minutes.

The images are captured using the Actimetrix Limelight software which stores files under the *.llii extension, and then converts it into the MPEG-4 coding. The videos are then analyzed using behavior analysis software “The Observer 5.1”, (Version 5.0, Noldus Information Technology, Wageningen, The Netherlands). The video analysis is conducted by watching the animal behavior and scoring each according to type, and defining the length of the behavior (Dubuisson and Dennis, 1977). Scored behaviors include: (1) normal behavior, (2) putting no weight on the paw, (3) raising the paw, (4) licking/biting or scratching the paw. Elevation, favoring, or excessive licking, biting and scratching of the injected paw indicate a pain response. Analgesic response or protection from compounds is indicated if both paws are resting on the floor with no obvious favoring, excessive licking, biting or scratching of the injected paw.

Analysis of the formalin test data is done according to two factors: (1) Percent Maximal Potential Inhibitory Effect (% MPIE) and (2) pain score. The % MPIEs is calculated by a series of steps, where the first is to sum the length of non-normal behaviors (behaviors 1,2,3) of each animal. A single value for the vehicle group is obtained by averaging all scores within the vehicle treatment group. The following calculation yields the MPIE value for each animal:

MPIE (%)=100−[(treatment sum/average vehicle value)×100%]

The pain score is calculated from a weighted scale as described above. The duration of the behavior is multiplied by the weight (rating of the severity of the response), and divided by the total length of observation to determine a pain rating for each animal. The calculation is represented by the following formula:

Pain rating=[0(To)+1(T1)+2(T2)+3(T3)]/(To+T1+T2+T3)

CFA Induced Chronic Inflammatory Pain

In this test, tactile allodynia is assessed with calibrated von Frey filaments. Following a full week of acclimatization to the vivarium facility, 150 μL of the “Complete Freund's Adjuvant” (CFA) emulsion (CFA suspended in an oil/saline (1:1) emulsion at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL) is injected subcutaneously into the plantar surface of the left hind paw of rats under light isoflurane anaesthesia. Animals are allowed to recover from the anaesthesia and the baseline thermal and mechanical nociceptive thresholds of all animals are assessed one week after the administration of CFA. All animals are habituated to the experimental equipment for 20 minutes on the day prior to the start of the experiment. The test and control articles are administrated to the animals, and the nociceptive thresholds measured at defined time points after drug administration to determine the analgesic responses to each of the six available treatments. The time points used are previously determined to show the highest analgesic effect for each test compound.

Thermal nociceptive thresholds of the animals are assessed using the Hargreaves test. Animals are placed in a Plexiglas enclosure set on top of an elevated glass platform with heating units. The glass platform is thermostatically controlled at a temperature of approximately 30° C. for all test trials. Animals are allowed to accommodate for 20 minutes following placement into the enclosure until all exploration behavior ceases. The Model 226 Plantar/Tail Stimulator Analgesia Meter (IITC, Woodland Hills, Calif.) is used to apply a radiant heat beam from underneath the glass platform to the plantar surface of the hind paws. During all test trials, the idle intensity and active intensity of the heat source are set at 1 and 45 respectively, and a cut off time of 20 seconds is employed to prevent tissue damage.

The response thresholds of animals to tactile stimuli are measured using the Model 2290 Electrovonfrey anesthesiometer (IITC Life Science, Woodland Hills, Calif.) following the Hargreaves test. Animals are placed in an elevated Plexiglas enclosure set on a wire mesh surface. After 10 minutes of accommodation, pre-calibrated Von Frey hairs are applied perpendicularly to the plantar surface of both paws of the animals in an ascending order starting from the 0.1 g hair, with sufficient force to cause slight buckling of the hair against the paw. Testing continues until the hair with the lowest force to induce a rapid flicking of the paw is determined or when the cut off force of approximately 20 g is reached. This cut off force is used because it represent approximately 10% of the animals' body weight and it serves to prevent raising of the entire limb due to the use of stiffer hairs, which would change the nature of the stimulus.

Postoperative Models of Nociception

In this model, the hyperalgesia caused by an intra-planar incision in the paw is measured by applying increased tactile stimuli to the paw until the animal withdraws its paw from the applied stimuli. While animals are anaesthetized under 3.5% isofluorane, which is delivered via a nose cone, a 1 cm longitudinal incision is made using a number 10 scalpel blade in the plantar aspect of the left hind paw through the skin and fascia, starting 0.5 cm from the proximal edge of the heel and extending towards the toes. Following the incision, the skin is apposed using 2, 3-0 sterilized silk sutures. The injured site is covered with Polysporin and Betadine. Animals are returned to their home cage for overnight recovery.

The withdrawal thresholds of animals to tactile stimuli for both operated (ipsilateral) and unoperated (contralateral) paws can be measured using the Model 2290 Electrovonfrey anesthesiometer (IITC Life Science, Woodland Hills, Calif.). Animals are placed in an elevated Plexiglas enclosure set on a wire mesh surface. After at least 10 minutes of acclimatization, pre-calibrated Von Frey hairs are applied perpendicularly to the plantar surface of both paws of the animals in an ascending order starting from the 10 g hair, with sufficient force to cause slight buckling of the hair against the paw. Testing continues until the hair with the lowest force to induce a rapid flicking of the paw is determined or when the cut off force of approximately 20 g is reached. This cut off force is used because it represent approximately 10% of the animals' body weight and it serves to prevent raising of the entire limb due to the use of stiffer hairs, which would change the nature of the stimulus.

Neuropathic Pain Model; Chronic Constriction Injury

Briefly, an approximately 3 cm incision is made through the skin and the fascia at the mid thigh level of the animals' left hind leg using a no. 10 scalpel blade. The left sciatic nerve is exposed via blunt dissection through the biceps femoris with care to minimize haemorrhagia. Four loose ligatures are tied along the sciatic nerve using 4-0 non-degradable sterilized silk sutures at intervals of 1 to 2 mm apart. The tension of the loose ligatures is tight enough to induce slight constriction of the sciatic nerve when viewed under a dissection microscope at a magnification of 4 fold. In the sham-operated animal, the left sciatic nerve is exposed without further manipulation. Antibacterial ointment is applied directly into the wound, and the muscle is closed using sterilized sutures. Betadine is applied onto the muscle and its surroundings, followed by skin closure with surgical clips.

The response thresholds of animals to tactile stimuli are measured using the Model 2290 Electrovonfrey anesthesiometer (IITC Life Science, Woodland Hills, Calif.). Animals are placed in an elevated Plexiglas enclosure set on a wire mesh surface. After 10 minutes of accommodation, pre-calibrated Von Frey hairs are applied perpendicularly to the plantar surface of both paws of the animals in an ascending order starting from the 0.1 g hair, with sufficient force to cause slight buckling of the hair against the paw. Testing continues until the hair with the lowest force to induce a rapid flicking of the paw is determined or when the cut off force of approximately 20 g is reached. This cut off force is used because it represents approximately 10% of the animals' body weight and it serves to prevent raising of the entire limb due to the use of stiffer hairs, which would change the nature of the stimulus.

Thermal nociceptive thresholds of the animals are assessed using the Hargreaves test. Following the measurement of tactile thresholds, animals are placed in a Plexiglass enclosure set on top of an elevated glass platform with heating units. The glass platform is thermostatically controlled at a temperature of approximately 24 to 26° C. for all test trials. Animals are allowed to accommodate for 10 minutes following placement into the enclosure until all exploration behavior ceases. The Model 226 Plantar/Tail Stimulator Analgesia Meter (IITC, Woodland Hills, Calif.) is used to apply a radiant heat beam from underneath the glass platform to the plantar surface of the hind paws. During all test trials, the idle intensity and active intensity of the heat source are set at 1 and 55 respectively, and a cut off time of 20 seconds is used to prevent tissue damage.

Neuropathic Pain Model: Spinal Nerve Ligation

The spinal nerve ligation (SNL) neuropathic pain model is used as an animal (i.e. rat) model of neuropathic pain. In the SNL test, the lumbar roots of spinal nerves L5 and L6 are tightly ligated to cause nerve injury, which results in the development of mechanical hyperalgesia, mechanical allodynia and thermal hypersensitivity. The surgery is performed two weeks before the test day in order for the pain state to fully develop in the animals. Several spinal nerve ligation variations are used to characterize the analgesic properties of a compound of the invention.

(1) Ligation of the L5 spinal nerve; (2) Ligation of the L5 and L6 spinal nerves; (3) Ligation and transection of the L5 spinal nerve; (4) Ligation and transection of the L5 and L6 spinal nerves; or (5) Mild irritation of the L4 spinal nerve in combination with any one of the above (1)-(4).

While the animals are anaesthetized under 3.5% isofluorane delivered via a nose cone, an approximately 2.5 cm longitudinal incision is made using a number 10 scalpel blade in the skin just lateral to the dorsal midline, using the level of the posterior iliac crests as the midpoint of the incision. Following the incision, the isoflourane is readjusted to maintenance levels (1.5%-2.5%). At mid-sacral region, an incision is made with the scalpel blade, sliding the blade along the side of the vertebral column (in the saggital plane) until the blade hits the sacrum. Scissors tips are introduced through the incision and the muscle and ligaments are removed from the spine to expose 2-3 cm of the vertebral column. The muscle and fascia are cleared from the spinal vertebra in order to locate the point where the nerve exits from the vertebra. A small glass hook is placed medial to the spinal nerves and the spinal nerves are gently elevated from the surrounding tissues. Once the spinal nerves have been isolated, a small length of non-degradable 6-0 sterilized silk thread is wound twice around the ball at the tip of the glass hook and passed back under the nerve. The spinal nerves are then firmly ligated by tying a knot, ensuring that the nerve bulges on both sides of the ligature. The procedure may be repeated as needed. In some animals, the L4 spinal nerve may be lightly rubbed (up to 20 times) with the small glass hook to maximize the development of neuropathic pain. Antibacterial ointment is applied directly into the incision, and the muscle is closed using sterilized sutures. Betadine is applied onto the muscle and its surroundings, followed by skin closure with surgical staples or sterile non-absorbable monofilament 5-0 nylon sutures.

The analgesic effect produced by topical administration of a compound of the invention to the animals can then be observed by measuring the paw withdrawal threshold of animals to mechanical tactile stimuli. These may be measured using either the mechanical allodynia procedure or the mechanical hyperalgesia procedure as described below. After establishment of the appropriate baseline measurements by either method, topical formulation of a compound of the invention is applied on the ipsilateral ankle and foot. The animals are then placed in plastic tunnels for 15 minutes to prevent them from licking the treated area and removing the compound. Animals are placed in the acrylic enclosure for 15 minutes before testing the ipsilateral paw by either of the methods described below, and the responses are recorded at 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 hour post treatment.

A. Mechanical Allodynia Method

The pain threshold of animals to mechanical allodynia for both operated and control animals can be measured approximately 14 days post-surgery using manual calibrated von Frey filaments as follows. Animals are placed in an elevated plexiglass enclosure set on a wire mesh surface. Animals are allowed to acclimate for 20-30 minutes. Pre-calibrated Von Frey hairs are applied perpendicularly to the plantar surface of the ipsilateral paw of the animals starting from the 2.0 g hair, with sufficient force to cause slight buckling of the hair against the paw to establish the baseline measurements. Stimuli are presented in a consecutive manner, either in an ascending or descending order until the first change in response is noted, after which four additional Reponses are recorded for a total of six responses. The six responses measured in grams are entered into a formula as described by Chaplan, S. R. et al., J. Neurosci. Methods, 1994 July; 53(1):55-63, and a 50% withdrawal threshold is calculated. This constitutes the mechanical allodynia value.

B. Mechanical Hyperalgesia Method

The response thresholds of animals to tactile stimuli were measured using the Model 2290 Electrovonfrey anesthesiometer (IITC Life Science, Woodland Hills, Calif.). Animals were placed in an elevated Plexiglas enclosure set on a wire mesh surface. After 15 minutes of accommodation in this enclosure, a von Frey hair was applied perpendicularly to the plantar surface of the ipsilateral hind paws of the animals, with sufficient force, measured in grams, to elicit a crisp response of the paw. The response indicated a withdrawal from the painful stimulus and constituted the efficacy endpoint. The data were expressed as percent change from baseline threshold measured in grams.

In Vivo Assay for Treatment of Pruritis

The compounds of the invention can be evaluated for their activity as antipruritic agents by in vivo test using rodent models. One established model for peripherally elicited pruritus is through the injection of serotonin into the rostral back area (neck) in hairless rats. Prior to serotonin injections (e.g., 2 mg/mL, 50 μL), a dose of a compound of the present invention can be applied systemically through oral, intravenous or intraperitoneal routes or topically to a circular area fixed diameter (e.g. 18 mm). Following dosing, the serotonin injections are given in the area of the topical dosing. After serotonin injection the animal behavior is monitored by video recording for 20 min-1.5 h, and the number of scratches in this time compared to vehicle treated animals. Thus, application of a compound of the current invention could suppress serotonin-induced scratching in rats.

All of the U.S. patents, U.S. patent application publications, U.S. patent applications, foreign patents, foreign patent applications and non patent publications referred to in this specification are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail to facilitate understanding, it will be apparent that certain changes and modifications may be practiced within the scope of the appended claims. Accordingly, the described embodiments are to be considered as illustrative and not restrictive, and the invention is not to be limited to the details given herein, but may be modified within the scope and equivalents of the appended claims. 

We claim:
 1. A method of treating pain, wherein the method comprises administering to the mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound selected from the group consisting of:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein said pain is neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, visceral pain, cancer pain, chemotherapy pain, trauma pain, surgical pain, post-surgical pain, childbirth pain, labor pain, chronic pain, persistent pain, peripherally mediated pain, centrally mediated pain, chronic headache, migraine headache, sinus headache, tension headache, phantom limb pain, or dental pain, or a combination thereof.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein said pain is associated with neurogenic bladder, ulcerative colitis, or peripheral nerve injury, or a combination thereof.
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein said pain is associated with HIV, HIV treatment induced neuropathy, trigeminal neuralgia, post-herpetic neuralgia, eudynia, heat sensitivity, tosarcoidosis, irritable bowel syndrome, Crohns disease, pain associated with multiple sclerosis (MS), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), diabetic neuropathy, peripheral neuropathy, arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, atherosclerosis, paroxysmal dystonia, myasthenia syndromes, myotonia, malignant hyperthermia, cystic fibrosis, pseudoaldosteronism, rhabdomyolysis, hypothyroidism, bipolar depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, sodium channel toxin related illnesses, familial erythromelalgia, primary erythromelalgia, familial rectal pain, cancer, epilepsy, partial and general tonic seizures, restless leg syndrome, arrhythmias, fibromyalgia, neuroprotection under ischaemic conditions cause by stroke or neural trauma, tachy-arrhythmias, atrial fibrillation and ventricular fibrillation. 